JP2022121590A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent deterioration in game amusement.

SOLUTION: A first performance according to a result of determination can be executed before a predetermined timing for notifying of a result of the jackpot determination, and a second performance according to the result of determination can be executed after the predetermined timing for notifying of the result of the jackpot determination. An operation performance that a player can expect can be executed according to an operation of operation means in an effective period that occurs while a variation performance is executed. During the execution of the first performance, the operation performance can be executed while during the execution of the second performance, execution of the operation performance is restricted.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has developed, there has been a case where the ready-to-win effect is performed after performing the development effect (for example, "fusuma effect" in FIG. 14 of Patent Document 1 ”).

JP 2013-121404 A

However, after the ready-to-win effect ends (for example, ends after notification of a failure), no effect is performed, so some players cannot clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended. was also a factor in the decline of

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

In order to solve such problems, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising main control means, effect control means, and operation means operable by a player, wherein the main control means determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player; and identification information for displaying the result of the determination by variably displaying the identification information and then stopping the display when the determination is made. Display control means and command transmission means for transmitting a predetermined command are provided, and the effect control means is capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means and changes the pattern corresponding to the identification information. A variable performance can be executed to stop the symbols, the result of the determination can be notified at a predetermined timing in the variable performance, and a first performance can be executed according to the result of the determination before the predetermined timing. After the predetermined timing, a second effect that is different from the first effect and can be executed according to the result of the determination, and during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute an operation effect that makes a player expect in response to the operation of the operation means, and while the operation effect can be executed while the first effect is being executed, the second effect During execution of the performance, execution of the operation performance can be restricted.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decline in amusement in a game.

It is an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine with the glass frame opened. It is an example of a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the big-hit determination table of a big-hit lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting data table at the time of a jackpot game completion. It is a diagram showing an example of a special electric accessary product operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big winning a prize opening mode determination table for big prizes. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table regarding a normal design and a starting movable piece. 4 is a diagram showing an example of various storage areas of a main RAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special design stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal figure normal electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an auxiliary game process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (1) in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process (2) in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table before a reach. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up pattern determination table. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a roulette pattern determination table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a reach advance notice determination table, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a character group pattern determination table, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative member operation count determination table. be. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. (a) is a diagram showing command reception interrupt processing in the integrated control unit, and (b) is a diagram showing V-blank interrupt processing in the integrated control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing animation pattern setting processing in the general control unit; 1 is a time chart 1 showing details of each variation effect pattern; Animation 1 corresponding to the variable production pattern. Animation 2 corresponds to the variable effect pattern. Animation 3 corresponds to the variable effect pattern. Animation 4 corresponds to the variable effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the music composition for every fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a time chart 2 showing details for each variation effect pattern; FIG. FIG. 3 is a time chart 3 showing details for each variation effect pattern; FIG. FIG. 4 is a time chart 4 showing details for each variable effect pattern; FIG. FIG. 5 is a time chart 5 showing details of each variation effect pattern; FIG. FIG. 6 is a time chart 6 showing details for each variable effect pattern; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of the specific image, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship of the degree of appearance of the specific image at the time of losing and at the time of a big win. Animation 5 corresponding to the variable production pattern. Animation 6 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. Animation 7 corresponds to the variable effect pattern. Animation 8 corresponding to the variable production pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the allocation ratio of performance symbols when normal reach is lost, and (b) is a diagram showing the allocation ratio of performance symbols when SP reach or more is lost. Animation 9 corresponding to the variable production pattern. (a) is a diagram showing the allocation ratio of the performance symbols when the symbol boosting is successful, and (b) is a diagram showing the allocation ratio of the performance symbols when the symbol boosting is unsuccessful. This is an animation 10 corresponding to the variable production pattern. This is an animation 11 corresponding to the variable production pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing displayable operation prompting images and executable timings for each variable effect pattern; It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the 1st operation prompting image and 2nd operation prompting image of SP reach or more (at the time of loss). (a) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image at the time of losing in the high probability game state and the low probability game state and at the time of the jackpot (SP reach or more), and (b) is a diagram showing the selection ratio of the operation promotion image in the high probability game state and the low probability game It is a figure which shows the selection ratio of the 2nd operation prompting image at the time of losing in a state, and at the time of a big hit (SP reach or more). It is a figure which shows the frequency|count of vibration of the production|presentation button for every fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern, and an executable timing. 7 is a time chart 7 showing details for each variation effect pattern; An animation 12 corresponding to the variable effect pattern. 8 is a time chart 8 showing details of each variation effect pattern; An animation 13 corresponding to the variable production pattern. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing error-related commands and priorities; This is the animation 14 corresponding to the variable production pattern. This is the animation 15 corresponding to the variable production pattern. An animation 16 corresponding to the variable production pattern. It is a diagram showing a modification of the number of vibrations of the production button and executable timing for each variable production pattern.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of game machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the glass frame opened according to the embodiment of the present invention. Also, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 60 attached to an island facility of a game arcade, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported by the outer frame 60 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 in which game balls 200 flow down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), a production button 35 for changing the production mode by pressing, and at least two directions (this A cross button 36 that can be pressed in four directions in the embodiment is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., and performs sound effects. Further, the frame lighting devices 34b are provided at a plurality of positions so as to perform illumination effects by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each lamp.

The effect button 35 is provided with a effect button detection switch 35a, and when the effect button detection switch 35a detects the player's operation, a further effect is executed in response to this operation. Similarly, the cross button 36 is also provided with a cross button detection switch 36b so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In particular, in this embodiment, the production button 35 is configured to be vertically movable by the production button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4). Also, the production button 35 can be changed from the first mode (non-vibrating mode) to the second mode (vibrating mode) by the performance button drive motor 35b (not shown).

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for shooting game balls toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a tray 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , and has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down in the direction of the operating handle 3 (see FIG. 2). A receiving port for receiving game balls is provided at the downwardly inclined end of the receiving tray 40. The game balls received in this receiving port are moved to the glass frame 50 by driving the ball feed solenoid 4b. Game balls are delivered one by one to a ball delivery opening 41 provided on the back surface.

Then, the game ball sent to the ball feed opening 41 is guided to the downwardly inclined end portion of the shooting rail 42 by the shooting rail 42 having a downward slope toward the hitting member 4c. A stopper 43 for stopping the game ball is provided above the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42, and the game ball sent out from the ball feeding opening 41 is pushed to the end of the downward slope of the launch rail 42. One game ball will be parked at the part (see FIG. 2).

When the player touches the operating handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operating handle 3 detects contact between the operating handle 3 and the player. Thereafter, when the player rotates the operating handle 3, the shooting volume 3b directly connected to the operating handle 3 also rotates, the shooting volume 3b adjusts the shooting intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is shot with the adjusted shooting intensity. A driving member 4c directly connected to the solenoid 4a rotates. By rotating the hitting member 4c, the game ball 200 stored at the downwardly inclined end portion of the shooting rail 42 is hit by the hitting member 4c, and the game ball is shot to the game area 6.例文帳に追加

When the game ball shot as described above rises from the shooting rail 42 between the rails 5a and 5b and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, it reaches the game area 6 and then freely falls within the game area 6. do. At this time, the game balls fall unpredictably due to a plurality of nails and pinwheels provided in the game area 6.例文帳に追加

In the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are various winning openings (general winning opening 12, normal pattern gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, first big winning opening 16, second big winning opening 17), an image display device 31, and a decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 are provided.

Also, inside the first starting port 14, a starting port lamp 14b is provided. In this case, it is possible to emit light in a color corresponding to the color of the pending icon. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 14 and changes the pending icon to a green pending icon, the starting port lamp 14b can also emit green light.
The hold icon can be changed to blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors in addition to the normal white color, and the starting port lamp 14b can also emit light in a corresponding color. .

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol reservation display device 23. , a second special symbol reservation display 24 and a normal symbol reservation display 25 are provided.

In the lower left part of the game area 6, a game ball launched (so-called left-handed) toward the left area of the game area 6 can win (enter the ball), and can be launched toward the right area of the game area 6. (So-called right-handed) game balls are not allowed to enter three general prize-winning openings 12 are provided. In addition, one general winning hole 12 is provided in which left-handed game balls cannot win.

Here, each general winning hole 12 is provided with a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when it is detected that the game balls have entered the general winning hole 12, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from a payout device for paying out the game balls. .

In the central lower part of the game area 6, a first starting port 14 constituting a starting area in which left-handed game balls can win and right-handed game balls cannot win, and a left-handed game ball. , and a second starting port 15 forming a starting area in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a ball) are arranged vertically.

The second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b constituting a normal electric accessory (starting port opening and closing device) for facilitating the winning of game balls to the second starting port 15, and a second starting port opening and closing solenoid 15c, and a closed state (closed mode) in which the starting movable piece 15b stands vertically by the operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c to restrict the winning of game balls to the second starting port 15; , and an open state (open state) in which the start movable piece 15b is tilted and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 is allowed. When the second starting port 15 is in the open state, the starting movable piece 15b functions as a tray for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 15, so the game balls to the second starting port 15 are more likely to reach the second starting port 15 than when it is in the closed state. winning opportunities (winning ratio) will increase.

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the winning of a game ball (entering a ball), and the second starting port 15 is provided with a winning of a game ball (entering a ball). ) is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a. When the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 is detected, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained for performing a "big win lottery (judgment of a big win)" to be described later.

Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, in addition to the above-mentioned random number for judging a big hit, a random number for special symbol judgment for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is generated. , The reach determination random number and special figure fluctuation random number for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are also acquired. In addition, the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure fluctuation are called special figure determination information. In addition, the fact that the special symbols are changing is called "fluctuation display", and the fact that the special symbols are stopped and displayed (completely stopped and displayed without moving) is called "fixed stop display". Sometimes.

Furthermore, when the winning of game balls into the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the first start port 14 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second start port 15 may be the same.

On the left and right sides of the game area 6, there are provided normal symbol gates 13 that form a normal area through which game balls can pass.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting passage (entry) of a game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a random value for hit determination is acquired for performing a "hit lottery (hit determination)" described later.

Further, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation time of the normal symbol. A random number for normal/universal pattern fluctuation for determination is also obtained. In addition, the random number value for hit determination, the random number value for normal pattern determination, and the random number value for normal pattern fluctuation are referred to as normal pattern determination information.

In the area on the right side of the game area 6, there is a first big winning opening 16 in which a right-handed game ball can win (enter a ball) and a left-handed game ball cannot win, and a second big winning. The openings 17 are vertically spaced apart (with a width through which game balls can pass).

The first big winning hole 16 opens and closes the first big winning hole constituting a first special electric accessory (first big winning hole opening/closing device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the first big winning hole 16. It has a door 16b and a first big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, and when the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c operates, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b stands substantially vertically and the first big winning opening 16 opens. A closed state (closed mode) for regulating the winning of game balls to and an open state (open mode) for allowing the winning of game balls to the first big winning port 16 by tilting the first big winning port open/close door 16b. and is controlled by conversion. When the first big winning opening 16 is in the open state, the first big winning opening opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray for guiding the game balls to the first big winning opening 16, so the first big winning opening and closing door 16b is larger than when it is in the closed state. The winning chance (winning ratio) of the game ball to the winning hole 16 is increased.

Here, the first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when the winning of game balls into the first big winning hole 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second big winning hole 17 opens and closes the second big winning hole constituting a second special electric accessory (second big winning hole opening/closing device) for facilitating the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 17. It has a door 17b and a second big prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c, and when the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c operates, the second big winning opening opening/closing door 17b stands substantially vertically and the second big winning opening/closing solenoid 17 is opened. A closed state (closed mode) for regulating the winning of game balls to and an open state (open mode) for allowing the winning of game balls to the second big winning port 17 by tilting the second big winning port open/close door 17b. and is controlled by conversion. When the second large winning opening 17 is in the open state, the second large winning opening opening/closing door 17b functions as a receiving tray for guiding the game balls to the second large winning opening 17. The winning chance (winning ratio) of the game ball to the winning hole 17 is increased.

Here, the second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a for detecting winning of a game ball (entering a ball). Then, when the winning of game balls into the second big winning hole 17 is detected, preset prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out. The number of prize balls put out when the game balls enter the first big prize hole 16 and the number of prize balls put out when the game balls win the second big prize hole 17 may be different.

At the bottom of the game area 6, win any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first big winning opening 16, and the second big winning opening 17 (ball winning) An out port 11 is provided for discharging game balls that have not been played outside the game area.

Also, in the center of the game area 6, an image display device 31 configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided. Two or more image display devices 31 may be provided.

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when no game is played, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three production patterns 38 (left production pattern 38a, medium production pattern 38b, right production pattern 38c) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the fluctuation production described later are variably displayed, and the specific production pattern 38 is displayed. A combination (for example, 777, etc.) is fixed and stopped to be displayed, so that a big win is notified as a lottery result of the big win, and a combination (for example, 289, etc.) other than the specific performance pattern 38 is fixed and stopped to be displayed. Loss is reported as a lottery result.

This production pattern 38 starts variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. , the fixed stop display is performed in accordance with the fixed stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of variable display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern and the timing of the fixed stop display of the production pattern 38 and the special pattern correspond to each other. It should be noted that the fact that the effect pattern 38 is being changed is sometimes referred to as "variation display", and the fact that the effect pattern 38 stops changing and is stopped is sometimes referred to as "determined stop display". Further, in the effect pattern 38, there is a case where "temporary stop display" is performed before "fixed stop display", but "temporary stop display" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43(b) T1 to T2, etc., the effect pattern 38 is composed of a character image as a first component and a number image as a second component. It is configured.
In addition, the effect pattern 38 is a scene (for example, FIG. 43(c) T6 to T7) composed of a character image as a first component and a number image as a second component in a variable effect described later. ), and a scene (for example, T4 to T5 in FIG. 43(c)) composed only of numeric images, which are the second component.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even when the game ball wins (ball enters) the first start port 14, even when the game ball wins (ball enters) the second start port 15, the fluctuation In the production, the same kind of production patterns 38 are displayed in a variable manner and fixed and stopped. However, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 and when the game ball enters the second starting port 15, different types of performance symbols 38 are displayed in a variable display and fixed stop display. can be configured to In addition, the variable display (variable direction, variable mode) of the production pattern 38, and the production (production by display, production by sound, production by light emission) etc. performed together with the production pattern 38 may be referred to as "variation production".

It should be noted that, among the combinations of the specific effect symbols 38 for which a big win is announced, the combination of "777" is a combination that confirms the third big win (a combination that is selected only at the time of the third big win) in FIG. 7 described later. .
On the other hand, among the combinations of the specific effect symbols 38 for which the big win is announced, combinations other than "777" (for example, "666") can be either the first big win or the third big win in FIG. 7 to be described later. It is a combination that has a certainty (a combination that is selected in either case of the first jackpot or the third jackpot).
That is, "7 symbols" are symbols suggesting that a second special game (eg, second jackpot) more advantageous to the player than the first special game (eg, first jackpot) is executed. However, other than 7 symbols, for example, "6 symbols" can be said to be symbols suggesting that the first special game (for example, the first jackpot) will be executed.

In addition, when a combination of symbols other than 7 symbols, for example, "6 symbols" is displayed and a big win is achieved, a predetermined effect is performed while the big win game is being performed, and after the big win game ends, a low value is displayed. It is notified whether the probability game state or the high probability game state is reached.

Also, on the lower right side of the display section of the image display device 31, three small effect symbols 38d (see FIG. 43, etc.) for notifying the lottery result of the big win in the variable effect are displayed vertically (upper in this embodiment). to the bottom), the variable display is performed by scrolling the display.

The variable display of the small effect symbol 38d is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. and is stopped. That is, the variable display of the small effect pattern 38d is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the first special pattern or , the execution state of the variable display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

Incidentally, the small effect pattern 38d, like the effect pattern 38, is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9". It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode, etc.) showing the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect patterns 38d such as "777" or a combination of small effect patterns 38d with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is that. It is an aspect other than this.
Incidentally, the small effect pattern 38d is a pattern with a smaller display size than the effect pattern 38. - 特許庁For example, the display size of the performance pattern 38 may change before reaching the SP reach and after reaching the SP reach. is invariant. That is, the small effect pattern 38d is always a pattern smaller in display size than the effect pattern 38. - 特許庁
The small effect pattern 38d may always be displayed in a size larger than the effect pattern 38, or the small effect pattern 38d may be displayed in a size larger than the effect pattern 38.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the display area of the image display device 31, among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) has not been executed (undecided). In order to display the icon so that the player can easily grasp the first special symbol reservation number (U1) indicating the number of figure determination information, and special symbols acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 Among the judgment information, the second special symbol pending number (U2) indicating the number of special figure judgment information for which the jackpot lottery (jackpot judgment) has not been executed (unjudged) is displayed as an icon so that the player can easily grasp it. A pending icon display area 31b and a variable icon display area 31a for icon-displaying information indicating special figure determination information during execution of variable display (variable effect) so that the player can easily grasp are provided. (See FIG. 43, etc.).

Although omitted in FIG. 43 and the like, when both the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) exist, in the reserved icon display area 31b, one of the respective reserved icons The parts are overlapped and displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area 31b may be provided for the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

In the following description, the icon displayed in the pending icon display area 31b is referred to as "holding icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has not been executed and is equivalent to pending information)", and the variable icon display area 31a The displayed icon is referred to as "the relevant variation icon (which is special figure determination information during execution of variation display (variation effect) that has been executed for jackpot determination and corresponds to execution information)".

The decorative member 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion erected from the game board 2 on the outer circumference thereof so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. It is

Board lighting devices 34a having a plurality of lamps (such as LEDs) are provided on the left and right sides of the decorative member 7, and above the decorative member 7, the title (model name) of the game machine 1, " A first decorative member 33a (effect accessory) imitating a "signboard" is provided, and a second decorative member 33b (effect accessory) imitating a "sword" is provided on the right side of the decorative member 7.

The first decorative member 33a is driven by a board driving device 33 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like, and is capable of moving in the vertical direction (from the initial position to the operating position). It can be moved to the front of the image display device 31 (actuated from the initial position to the operating position) by movement. Similarly, the second decorative member 33b is also driven by the board driving device 33, and tilts to the left with the bottom of the second decorative member 33b serving as a fulcrum, and can move to the front of the image display device 31. FIG. The second decorative member 33b is composed of a sheath portion 33b1 imitating a scabbard and a blade portion 33b2 housed in the scabbard. from the initial position to the operating position).

At least one of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be provided with a liquid crystal display, and at least one of the pending icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display. One of the liquid crystal display provided on the decorative member 33a and the liquid crystal display provided on the second decorative member 33b may be provided with the pending icon display area and the other may be provided with the variable icon display area.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time. After variably displaying the lottery result, the first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is notified by fixed and stopped display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15, and displays the second special symbol over a predetermined time. After the variable display, the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result is notified by fixed and stopped display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and/or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, it may be configured such that "7" is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won, and "-" is fixed and displayed when the game is lost.

Here, the "jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball wins (enters) the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, a random value for judging a big hit is obtained, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit is A process (jackpot determination) for determining whether a random number value corresponds to a "jackpot".

Also, in the present embodiment, "jackpot" refers to a jackpot game ( It means that the player has acquired the right to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player.

In the "jackpot game", a round game in which the first big prize opening 16 (first special electric role) or the second big prize opening 17 (second special electric role) is opened is a special electric role is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or 16 times) by activating the accessory continuous actuating device for continuously activating the .

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operation time of the special electric accessory) of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 in each round game. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) enter the winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game" is a game in which a game ball enters the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17 and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning ball. is. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game (special game), the jackpot lottery cannot be performed immediately. In such cases, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (entrance) in the first start port 14 is stored as the first reservation to the limit of four, and the game is played in the second start port 15 The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (enters the ball) is stored as a second reservation, and up to four pieces are stored. The first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of the first reservation, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the number of the second reservation, are the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special It is displayed on the symbol reservation display device 24 .

In addition, when the first reservation is one, the leftmost LED of the first special symbol reservation display 23 is lit, and when the first reservation is two, the leftmost end of the first special symbol reservation display 23 , two LEDs light up. Also, when there are three first reservations, the three LEDs from the leftmost end of the first special symbol reservation display 23 flash and the LED on the right lights up, and when there are four first reservations, the first Four LEDs from the leftmost end of the special symbol holding display 23 are lit. Also, in the second special symbol reservation display 24, the number of reservations of the second reservation is displayed in the same manner as described above.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (judgment result) is notified by displaying normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopping and displaying normal symbols of a type corresponding to the result of the lottery, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs or the like. It is

Here, "winning lottery" is a random number value obtained by acquiring a random number value for winning determination when a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the obtained random number value for winning determination corresponds to "winning". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "winning" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player in the winning lottery executed based on the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. Say. In the "auxiliary game", the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 is converted and controlled to the open state over a predetermined time. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball enters the second starting port 15 (enters a ball) and the player can win a prize ball corresponding to the winning. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described later in detail.

In addition, as with the special symbols, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, such as during the variable display of the normal symbols or during the auxiliary game, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately, under certain conditions, The right of the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 is stored as a limit of 4 pieces as the third reservation. The number of normal design reservations (G), which is the number of third reservations, is displayed on the normal design reservation display device 25 in the same manner as the first special design reservation display device 23 and the second special design reservation display device 24. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player's side) so as to be visible. Note that the glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50 .

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism portion 51 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the game machine 1), and the hinge mechanism portion 51 serves as a fulcrum. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the gaming machine 1) can be rotated in a direction to release it from the outer frame 60. As shown in FIG. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52 and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum, thereby opening the inner part of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 .

A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided on the other end of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction. Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. The glass frame 50 is also provided with a door open switch 133 for detecting whether or not the glass frame 50 is released from the outer frame 60 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear surface of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, a game information output terminal board 30, and the like. A power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1 and a power switch (not shown) are provided on the power board 140 .

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first starting opening detection switch 14a, and controls the first special symbol display device 20 and the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c. etc. is driven to control the game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the performance control board 120 , the payout control board 130 and the power supply board 140 . Communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated only in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Also, the main control board 110 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

In addition, the main control board 110 has a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and various data and tables required for game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It has at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

The main control input port includes a payout control board 130, a general winning hole detection switch 12a for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 12, and a normal symbol gate 13 for detecting that a game ball has passed. A gate detection switch 13a, a first start hole detection switch 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first start hole 14, and a second start hole that detects that a game ball has entered the second start hole 15. A detection switch 15a, a first big winning hole detection switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 16, and a second large winning hole detecting switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 17. A winning opening detection switch 17a and a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the output port for the main control, production control board 120, payout control board 130, the second start opening opening and closing solenoid 15c for opening and closing the start movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15, the first big winning opening opening and closing door 1st large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c for operating 16b, second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c for operating second large winning opening opening/closing door 17b, first special symbol display device 20 for displaying special symbols, and second special symbol Display device 21, normal symbol display device 22 for displaying normal symbols, first special symbol reservation display 23 and second special symbol reservation display 24 for displaying the number of reserved special symbols, normal for displaying the number of reserved normal symbols A pattern holding display 25, a round number display 66 that displays the corresponding number of rounds when multiple types of round numbers are provided, and toward the right side area of the game area 6 in a time-saving game state or a high probability game state A right-handed display 67 for notifying the shooting, a game information output terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output from this output port for main control.

The main CPU 110a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or uses the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In the main ROM 110b, in addition to the game control program, a big win determination table (see FIG. 5) used for a big win lottery, a special symbol determination table (see FIG. 6) for determining special symbols to be fixed and stopped, and a big win A set data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the end (see FIG. 7), a special electric accessory operation mode determination table (see FIG. 8) for determining the opening and closing conditions of the opening and closing door of the big winning opening, and a big winning Mouth opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9), special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10) for determining the variation pattern of special symbols, hit determination table (see FIG. 11) to be referred to in the winning lottery, etc. are stored. there is It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The main RAM 110c has a special symbol special electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol normal electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a stop normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol retention. Number (U1) storage area, 2nd special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, 1st jackpot determination random number storage area, 2nd jackpot determination random number storage area, number of round games (R) storage area, number of times opened (K) storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start release counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, number of time-saving games (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Various timer counters such as an auxiliary game timer counter are provided. Note that the above-described storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 110 or the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 30 is wire-connected to the main control board 110, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

The effect control board 120 is a sub-control board (sub-control means) that controls a game-related effect (performed in the game machine 1) based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. FIG. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 120b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 120c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an effect control unit 120m, an image display device 31, and an audio output device. 32 (speaker), etc., a display/sound control unit 150, a board lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a board driving device 33, a production button driving motor 35b, etc., and a lamp/driving control unit 160, It has an input port, an output port, etc. for control of production.

The sub CPU 120a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 120b, and uses the sub RAM 120c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects, thereby executing commands received from the main control board 110. In response to input signals from the , effect button detection switch 35a, and the cross button detection switch 36b, various control units (display/sound control unit 150, lamp/driving control unit 160) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

Further, when the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation mode of the special symbol from the main control board 110, it analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and performs the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board, and so on. Effect data (effect pattern designation command, etc., which will be described later) for causing the drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button driving motor 35b to execute a predetermined effect is determined. Then, the determined production data is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, thereby performing control for executing the variable production.

In the sub ROM 120b, in addition to a program for controlling effects, a variable effect pattern determination table for determining a variable effect pattern for executing a variable effect, etc. are stored in the sub ROM 120b. It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The sub-RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The input port of the effect control board 120 is connected to the effect button detection switch 35a, the cross button detection switch 36b, and the like. In the performance control board 120, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 35 has been operated is input from the performance button detection switch 35a, and a cross button detection indicating that the cross button 36 has been operated is input from the cross button detection switch 36b. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

Here, by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to perform "volume adjustment" for adjusting the volume of BGM, sound effects, etc., output from the audio output device 32. FIG. For example, the volume value can be adjusted in a range of 5 levels, and can be set from "1", which is the lowest volume value, to "5", which is the highest volume value in stages. . Further, the upper button is operated to increase the volume value in stages, and the lower button is operated to decrease the volume value in stages.

Also, by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button 36, it is possible to adjust the amount of light emitted from various LEDs of the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b, and the amount of light emitted from the backlight of the image display device 31. It has become. For example, the light intensity value can be adjusted in a range of 5 steps, and can be set from "1", which is the lowest light intensity value, to "5", which is the highest light intensity value. . Further, the right button is operated to step up the light amount value, and the left button is operated to step down the light amount value.

The display/sound control unit 150 receives a command from the effect control unit 120m, controls the image display device 31 to display a predetermined image, and controls the sound output device 32 to output a predetermined sound. do.

The display/sound control unit 150 includes an overall control unit 151 having an overall CPU 152 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 153 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 154 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP ( a CGROM 156 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 155 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 157, an audio control unit 158 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 159 storing audio data and the like, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 152 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 153, and uses the supervising RAM 154 as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect received from the effect control unit 120m. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 155 and the sound control unit 158 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , various information such as a duty ratio, which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 31 .

The image control unit 155 is connected to a CGROM 156 in which various image data are stored. Rendering data that is the basis of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on this. The image data is material data representing individual images such as an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 31, for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design, a character image, and a dialogue image. is. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 156 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 156 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 155, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 156 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 156 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 157 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 157 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control section 151 (the overall CPU 152), a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 155 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 156 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 151 (overall CPU 152). , drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and output to the image display device 31 to display various images. .

The image control unit 155 is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operation clock, a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 is generated. ) and output to the image display device 31 . In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 155 is set to 30 fps (1/30 second=approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times.

A general-purpose board 39 is connected between the image control unit 155 and the image display device 31 to convert image data into a predetermined image format and output the converted image data. The general-purpose substrate 39 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 that displays the image data. It absorbs the difference in resolution between when connected and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected.

The audio control unit 158 is connected to the audio output device 32, and outputs audio data and music data in accordance with the display of the image display device 31 based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 120m. (BGM, SE) and the like are controlled to be output from the audio output device 32 .

The lamp/driving control unit 160 includes a lamp CPU 160a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 160b that stores a lamp/driving control program, a lamp RAM 160c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 160a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 160b, and uses the lamp RAM 160c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the board driving device 33, and the performance button driving motor 35b are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit. Based on the transmitted various performance data (including commands), lighting control of various LEDs of the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b is performed to perform light emission performance, etc., and the board driving device 33, the performance By controlling the drive source such as the motor of the button drive motor 35b and the solenoid, an action effect (the above-described movement effect) or the like is performed.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 132 for controlling the launch of game balls.

This payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 140 .

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b based on input signals from the payout ball counting detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door opening switch 133, and the timer, and performs arithmetic processing. Along with performing the processing, corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the processing.

The output side of the payout control board 130 is connected with a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from the game ball storage section. The payout CPU 131a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to produce a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

The shooting control unit 132 has the input side connected to the touch sensor 3a and the shooting volume 3b, and the output side connected to the shooting solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a, and controls energization of the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feeding solenoid 4b based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operating handle 3, and is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in electrostatic capacity when the player touches the operating handle 3. FIG. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 3, it outputs a touch signal to the shooting control section 132 to permit the energization of the shooting solenoid 4a. The shooting control unit 132 is basically configured so as not to shoot the game ball 200 to the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is directly connected to the rotating portion of the operating handle 3, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control section 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control section 132 is variable). The shooting control unit 132 energizes the shooting solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the shooting volume 3b, and rotates the hitting member 4c directly connected to the shooting solenoid 4a, thereby causing the game ball 200 to play. Fire in area 6.

The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid. The firing solenoid 4a is directly connected to the ejection member 4c, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 4a rotates the ejection member 4c.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control section 132. FIG. As a result, the number of shooting games per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid makes one rotation. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a rectilinear solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the receiving tray 40 one by one toward the hitting member 4c directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 has a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the game machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, A power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110 . More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low-probability gaming state" and a "high-probability gaming state" as a state related to the jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving gaming state" as a state related to the start movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. It has a "time saving game state". The state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state) related to the jackpot lottery and the state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) related to the starting movable piece 15b can be associated with each other, and can be made independent. can. in short,
(1) "Low probability time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(2) "Low probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state;
(3) "High probability time-saving gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state;
(4) It is possible to provide a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability non-time-saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. Also, the "low probability time-saving gaming state" is referred to as "time-saving gaming state" in the present embodiment. Further, the "high probability time-saving gaming state" is referred to as "high probability gaming state" in the present embodiment. It should be noted that the "normal gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" may be collectively referred to as "low probability gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" means that in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, the winning probability of the jackpot is For example, it refers to a game state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high-probability game state" means a game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability game state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/60, for example. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time-saving game It is a game state that is set longer than the "state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 15 short when winning is won. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal design gate 13, a winning lottery is performed, and the normal design is variably displayed in the normal design display device 22, but the normal design is 30 seconds, for example, after the variability display is started. Stop display later. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 15 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time-saving game State" and the opening time of the second starting port 15 when winning is, for example, 3 seconds, which is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as high as 15/16. set. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state", the "time-saving gaming state" is such that the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the opening time of the second start port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are advantageous. have set. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG.

(jackpot determination table for jackpot lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a big hit determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a jackpot lottery jackpot determination table triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 14, and FIG. It is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball. The jackpot probabilities are the same in the tables of FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b).

As shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), in the jackpot determination table, probability game states, jackpot determination random numbers, and jackpot determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), and based on the current probability gaming state and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination, determines whether a "jackpot" has occurred. or "losing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5(a), two random numbers for jackpot determination, "7" and "8", are determined to be jackpots in the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, ten random numbers for judging a big win from "7" to "16" are judged as a big win. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number for judging a big win is from 0 to 599, the probability of being judged as a big win in the low-probability game state is 1/300, and it is judged as a big win in the high-probability game state. The probability is 1/60, which is five times higher.

(Special design decision table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the types of special symbols to be fixed and stopped displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) is a special symbol determination table for losing, and FIG. 6(b) is a special symbol determination table for big hits.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the special symbol determination table for losing, the type of the special symbol display device, and when the game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15, it is acquired. A random number value for special symbol determination and a losing special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of losing special symbols may be associated with the special symbol determination random number so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of losing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the special symbol determination table for the big hit includes the type of the special symbol display device (the type of the starting port where the game ball has won), the first starting port 14, or the second starting A random number value for special symbol determination acquired when a game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with a jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6, and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random number value for special symbol determination, and the like.

Then, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, based on the determined special symbol type (stop special symbol data), the performance symbol designation command as the special symbol information is determined. Here, one command of the performance pattern designation command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. data. This also applies to a variation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the jackpot game type (see FIG. 8) are determined by the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data). , It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the game state after the end of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game. Therefore, in the column of special symbols in FIG. 6(b), explanations corresponding to the types of jackpot games are additionally described.

(Setting data table at the end of jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a setting data table at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game is finished.

As shown in FIG. 7, the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game includes stop special figure data of special symbols, game state buffer, time saving game state, time saving game number (J), probability game state, high probability It is associated with the number of games played (X).

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state when the jackpot is won. The game state is composed of a combination of a time-saving game state (or a non-time-saving game state) and a high-probability game state (or a low-probability game state).

Specifically, if the game state buffer is "00H", the game state information (that is, the normal game state ). If the game state buffer is "01H", the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, indicating the game state information of the high probability game state and non-time saving game state. If the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information of the low probability game state and the time saving game state (that is, the time saving game state) in which the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set. . If the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information of the high probability game state and the time reduction game state in which both the time saving flag and the high probability game flag are set (that is, the high probability game state). According to the game machine specifications (specs) of the present embodiment, the game state buffer does not become "01H". If the specification has a so-called "variable latent probability", the game state buffer may become "01H".

The main CPU 110a refers to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the game status buffer, the time saving game state, the number of time saving games (J), and the probability. A game state and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

As a feature of the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7 in this embodiment, the “first jackpot” is given 100 times as the number of time-saving games (J) and 0 times as the number of high-probability games (X). is given, and the “second jackpot” is given 10000 times as the number of time-saving games (J), 10000 times is given as the number of high-probability games (X), and the “third jackpot” is the number of time-saving games (J ) is given as 10000 times, and 10000 times is given as the high probability game number (X). Also, the "first jackpot" is provided with a low-probability game state, and the "second jackpot" and "third jackpot" are provided with a high-probability game state.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessary product operating mode determination table for determining the big winning hole opening mode table. As will be described later, since the big winning game is executed based on this big winning opening opening mode table, it can be said that the big winning opening opening mode table indicates the type of the big winning game. In the present embodiment, the term "table" will be omitted as appropriate and described as "TBL".

As shown in FIG. 8, the special electric accessary product operating mode determination table is associated with the stop special figure data of the special symbols and the big winning opening mode table.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the big winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol.

(Grand prize opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large winning opening opening/closing mode table determined in FIG. is determined.

Specifically, it is a group of big winning opening mode determination tables for big winning that are referred to during a big winning game, and is composed of a first big winning table, a second big winning table, and a third big winning table.

In the big winning hole opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 9, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 16 or second big winning hole 17) and the maximum number of round games in one big winning game , a specified number indicating the maximum number of prizes to be won in one round, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, and the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened in each round game. , one opening time of the big winning slot in each round game, one closing time of the big winning slot in each round game, an interval time until the next round game is executed, and the end of the last round game. to the end of the jackpot game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot TBL, the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot TBL, and the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot TBL. Become.

According to the first big winning TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b is operated to open the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. A first jackpot game can be executed. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 16 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 16-round game ends, the first jackpot game ends.

According to the second big winning TBL shown in FIG. 9, the first big winning opening/closing door 16b is operated, and the first big winning opening 16 on the right side of the game area 6 is opened for two rounds (twice) at a maximum of 1 It is possible to execute a second jackpot game with an 8-second opening. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls wins the first big winning hole 16 before the opening time of 1.8 seconds elapses, one round of the game ends. Then, when the second round game ends, the second jackpot game ends.

According to the third big winning TBL shown in FIG. 9, the second big winning opening/closing door 17b is operated to open the second big winning opening 17 on the right side of the game area 6 for up to 29 seconds per round. A third jackpot game can be executed. However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls enter the second big winning hole 17 before the opening time elapses for 29 seconds, one round of the game ends. Then, when the 16-round game ends, the third jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, there are provided three types of "jackpot games (special games)" from the first jackpot game to the third jackpot game, in which the big win opening to be opened and the action of opening the big win opening are different. Therefore, players can enjoy various special games.

In addition, the opening time of the second jackpot game (1.8 seconds) is shorter than the opening time of the first jackpot game (29 seconds) and the opening time of the third jackpot game (29 seconds), for example. Therefore, it can be said that it is a "disadvantageous mode of opening".

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a special symbol variation pattern (variation time, etc.) as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a jackpot determination result, a special symbol (stop special symbol data), a random value for reach determination, and a special symbol The number of reservations (U1 or U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" defines at least the determination result of the big hit and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, when a big win is made, the ready-to-win game is always performed. It should be noted that the reach determination random number, the random number range is set to 97 (0-96), the special figure fluctuation random number, the random number range is set to 100 (0-99).

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the variation pattern (1) (normal variation ) is set to be shorter than the variation time (T1) of the variation pattern (2) (shortened variation). Although the maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the reserved number of special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined after subtracting 1 from the reserved number of special symbols. Therefore, "4" will not be referenced as the pending number. In addition, hereinafter, "normal fluctuation 1" and "normal fluctuation 2" may be collectively referred to simply as "normal fluctuation".

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol to be stopped, the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2). ), the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation time of the special symbol are determined.

Then, based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, a special symbol variation pattern designation command is generated, and information on the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In this embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 14 is indicated, and the MODE data is When it is "E7H", it indicates the special symbol variation pattern designation command of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the game ball winning in the second starting port 15. - 特許庁

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern designation command). In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the contents of the effect such as the effect pattern 38 are described as a reference.

Here, "normal variation 1", "normal variation 2", and "shortening variation" as the contents of the production mean that the plurality of production patterns 38 fluctuate at high speed and stop without reaching reach. The normal variation 1, the normal variation 2, and the shortened variation are different in that the shortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the normal variation 1 and the normal variation 2.

In addition, "ready-to-win" means a variation that gives the player a sense of anticipation of a big win, such as a temporary stop display of some of the combinations of the performance symbols 38 informing of the big win, and the other performance symbols 38 fluctuating. means embodiment. For example, when the combination of the three-digit performance symbols 38 of "777" is set as the combination of the performance symbols 38 for informing a big hit, the two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining performance symbols are displayed. It refers to a mode in which the production pattern 38 is changing. It should be noted that "temporary stop display (temporary stop)" means that the performance pattern 38 shakes slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the performance pattern 38 is stopped. refers to the mode.

Also, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") for executing a jackpot game in which two performance symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one performance symbol 38 fluctuates. is doing. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not result in a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be configured to result in a big hit. In addition, "SP reach" means super reach, which has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect pattern 38 that is not temporarily stopped undergoes a special change, the effect pattern 38 changes, or the background image changes to display a special character. Further, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the super reach. Also in "SPSP Reach", the performance pattern 38 changes, the background image changes, and a special character is displayed, for example, a photographed image is displayed. In addition, "full rotation reach" means a state in which all the combinations of a plurality of performance symbols 38 that notify a big win are aligned and fluctuates at a low speed. Represents the reach performed. In addition, "SP reach" or that "SPSP reach" is performed may be called "SP reach or more."

It should be noted that the production pattern 38 in "SP reach" and "SPSP reach" changes, for example, up to "SP reach" and "SPSP reach", the production pattern 38 was composed of numbers + characters. However, after reaching "SP reach" or "SPSP reach", the production pattern 38 changes to numbers only, and when the production pattern 38 changes to numbers only, "SP reach" or "SPSP It corresponds to that the display size becomes smaller (changes smaller) than the display size of the production pattern 38 up to "reach".

In this way, the effect pattern 38 has a scene composed of numbers and characters and a scene composed only of numbers in the variable effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 43(c) T4-T5, in the configuration of numbers only, as shown in FIG. is low, and in the composition of numbers and characters, it can be said that the decorativeness of the production pattern 38 itself is high.
That is, in a scene where attention is paid to whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the player is also paying attention to whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur, that is, to the effect pattern 38, so the effect pattern is highly decorative. By using 38, the game interest can be improved. On the other hand, in "SP reach" or the like, in a scene where the player pays attention to whether or not a big win will occur, there is a high possibility that the player will also pay attention to whether or not the player will win a big win, that is, the character image, etc., rather than the performance pattern 38. By using the performance pattern 38 with low decorativeness, it is possible to prevent the player from paying too much attention to the performance pattern 38, and to make the character image or the like to be gazed at.

In addition, the "pseudo consecutive number of times" means "the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed", and the "pseudo continuous notice" is the effect It means an advance notice by a variation mode in which the pattern 38 is temporarily stopped and displayed and then changed again, and the effect pattern 38 is changed and temporarily stopped a plurality of times. The numbers in parentheses in the column for the number of pseudo-runs indicate the number of times the variation display is performed visually by executing the pseudo-runs. By performing this operation twice, it appears that the variation display is performed 4 times (pseudo 4 variations).

Further, when suggesting the execution of the "pseudo-continuous advance notice", only the effect pattern 38 may be used, or a dedicated "pseudo-continuous execution suggestive pattern" may be used.
For example, when suggesting the execution of the "pseudo continuous notice" using only the effect pattern 38, it is possible to suggest the execution of the "pseudo continuous notice" by temporarily stopping and displaying a combination of different odd-numbered effect patterns 38. Good, for example, 5 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left effect symbol 38a, 5 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle effect symbol 38b, 6 symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the right effect symbol 38c, and "pseudo continuous notice ” may be suggested.
In addition, when suggesting the execution of the "pseudo-continuous advance notice" using the dedicated "pseudo-continuous execution suggestive symbol", a "pseudo-continuous execution suggestive symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) is newly added to the middle effect symbol 38b. , and if the "pseudo-continuous execution suggestive symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) stops, execution of the "pseudo-continuous advance notice" may be suggested.
It should be noted that the stop of the "pseudo continuous execution suggestive symbol" (for example, NEXT symbol) may be a temporary stop display like the effect symbol 38, or may be a fixed stop display unlike the effect symbol 38. - 特許庁

(Hit determination table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 11A, in the hit determination table, presence/absence of the time-saving game state, random numbers for hit determination, and hit determination results are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), and determines whether it is a "win" or a "lose" based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random number value for win determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), when it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, one specific hit determination random number value of "0" is determined to be hit. On the other hand, when it is in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random numbers from "0" to "14" are determined as hits. If it is a random number value other than the above, it is determined as "losing". Therefore, since the random number range of the hit determination random number is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving gaming state is 15. /16.

(Normal design decision table)
As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the normal symbol determination table, presence/absence of a time-saving gaming state, hit determination results, normal symbol determination random numbers, and normal symbols (stopped normal symbol data) are associated with each other. there is

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b), and based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the obtained random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed. Determine (stop normal map data).

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal pattern designation command as information of the normal symbols based on the determined normal symbol type (stop normal pattern data), and determines the normal pattern designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 11(d), the opening mode of the starting movable piece 15b is determined by the normal pattern (stop normal pattern data). It can be said that it is decided.

(Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11(c) is a diagram showing a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random number for normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern fluctuation time. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the time of variation.

Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal symbols, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol variation designation command as the information of the normal symbol variation time based on the determined normal symbol variation time, and determines the normal symbol variation designation command. is transmitted to the effect control board 120 .

As a feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. designed to be shorter than

(Determination table for starting opening mode of starting movable piece)
As shown in FIG. 11(d), the starting port opening mode determination table includes stop normal pattern data (normal pattern), the maximum number of openings of the starting movable piece 15b, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second starting port 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determine the ending time.

In this embodiment, in the starting port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11(d), the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 02 is more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 01 It is an open mode, and the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 03 is an opening mode more advantageous than the starting port opening mode based on the stop normal map data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 11(b), when winning is achieved in the time-saving game state, stop normal symbol data=03, which is the most advantageous release mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the start movable piece 15b operates more advantageously for the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 12(a) shows special figure determination information (random number for judging a big hit, special symbol for judging Random number, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure fluctuation) is a diagram showing a special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration, FIG. 12(c) shows normal pattern determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 (random value for hit determination, random value for normal pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation Random number) is stored in the general pattern determination information storage area, and FIG. 12D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit in the general pattern determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the special figure determination information storage area stores special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14. First special figure determination information holding storage A second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 15 is stored, and a special figure determination information during execution of the variable display is stored. The first special figure determination information holding storage area and the second special figure determination information holding storage area are divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively. there is

In addition, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is the first special design reservation number (U1), and these undetermined The number of pending icons corresponding to the special figure determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area is the second special symbol pending number (U2), the number of pending icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the pending icon display area 31b, and the special figure during execution of the variable display (variable effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area The variable icon corresponding to the figure determination information is displayed in the variable icon display area 31a.

In addition, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c in the image display device 31 (see FIG. 43 etc.), and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is displayed in the image display. It is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 31d in the device 31 (see FIG. 43, etc.). In addition, the number of reservations displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c and the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d may be simply referred to as "reservation number image". It should be noted that the "holding number image" merely notifies the number of holdings, and does not play a role of announcing the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), each storage unit includes a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage area for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored. Also, when the game ball enters the second start port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is included in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information holding storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the first special It is referred to execute variable display of symbols. Further, when the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage part of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. is referenced to perform

As shown in FIG. 12(c), the normal pattern determination information storage area is a normal pattern determination information holding storage area in which the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 13 is stored, It is composed of a general pattern execution storage area in which the general pattern determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the general pattern determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. In addition, the number of undetermined general pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the general pattern determination information retention storage area is the number of normal pattern retention (G).

As shown in FIG. 12(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern for storing the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 13 and the normal pattern determination information is acquired, the normal pattern determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area. The acquired general pattern determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number.

In the normal pattern execution storage area, when the starting condition for the variable display of the normal pattern is established, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the normal pattern variable display is performed. Referenced to run.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 .

When power is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process consisting of steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process moves to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process moves to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c. In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure with the newly calculated checksum. It determines whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S5, and if the checksum is not normal, there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 110c (the control state before power interruption cannot be normally restored). Then, the process moves to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not turned on, the process is shifted to step S6 assuming that the power recovery process is to be performed. If the RAM clear switch 111a is turned on, the power-on process is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM when power is restored. By performing this processing, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a initializes the devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power recovery designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to step S9. Transfer. As a result, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the power restoration notification.

Note that the power restoration notification means displaying a power restoration screen (image) indicating that power has been restored on the image display device 31 (for example, FIG. 72), or displaying a power restoration screen (image) indicating that power has been restored from the audio output device It is to output a recovery notification sound.

It should be noted that the information indicating the current game state may not be included in the power restoration designation command, and the game state designation command indicating the current game state may be transmitted before or after the power restoration designation command is transmitted.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 displays the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon. and processing for displaying the pending number image.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage specifying command indicating the normal symbol reserved number (G) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the normal symbol memory number.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM when the power is turned on, and shifts the process to step S13. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting of devices peripheral to the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the production control board 120, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S15. As a result, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the power-on notification is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The power-on notification means that the image display device 31 displays a power-on screen (image) indicating that the power is turned on, or the RAM clear notification from the audio output device 32 indicates that the main RAM 110c has been initialized. It is to output sound.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) and the special symbol variation random number value. The initial random value, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random value for normal symbol determination are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from a power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply substrate 140 . If power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S18, and if power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits the timer interrupt in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S20, sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S21. In step S22, a backup flag to be referred to when recovering from power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S22, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the system waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksum of all the used areas of the main RAM 110c is calculated and compared. A sum may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds), thereby executing timer interrupt processing described below.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening and closing time of the starting movable piece 15b, etc. update (decrease by 1) the various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, the process of updating the random number for big hit determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for hit determination, the random number for normal symbol determination, and the random number for normal symbol variation is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are incremented by one. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. .

The main CPU 110a performs initial random value update processing in step S130. Specifically, a process of updating (adding 1 to) the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number number for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for judging a normal symbol is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the first big winning opening detection switch 16a, the second big winning opening detection switch 17a, the first start opening detection switch 14a, the second start opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. It determines whether or not there is an input to the various switches, and if there is an input, performs processing for setting predetermined data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 .

The main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process in step S300. Specifically, it performs a process of controlling the jackpot lottery, the variable display of special symbols, the opening and closing of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the change of the game state, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal/universal electric power control processing. Specifically, processing for controlling winning lottery, variable display of normal symbols, opening and closing of the starting movable piece 15b, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, each winning ball counter is referred to, a payout number specifying command corresponding to each winning hole is generated, and a process of setting it in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c is performed. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and the process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game progress data creation processing in step S600. Specifically, the external information signal output from the game information output terminal plate 30, the drive data of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c, the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c. Drive data, display data of the first special symbol display device 20, display data of the second special symbol display device 21, display data of the normal symbol display device 22, display data of the first special symbol reservation display device 23, second special symbol A process of creating output data relating to the progress of the game, such as the display data of the reservation display device 24 and the display data of the normal symbol reservation display device 25, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S700. Specifically, processing for outputting the external information signal, various drive data, and various display data created in step S600 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and the transmission buffer to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and if the detection signal has been input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, and if the detection signal has been input, the detection signal for the large winning opening is detected. A process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start opening detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start opening, and the first special If the number of reserved symbols (U1) is less than 4, the first special reserved number of symbols (U1) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area (first When stored in the storage section to the fourth storage section), processing is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, the prize ball counter for the second starting port is incremented by 1, and the second If the special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is added by 1, and the special figure determination information is acquired to obtain the special figure determination information storage area. storage section to fourth storage section). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing, and terminates the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal design reservation number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal design reservation number (G) is Along with adding 1, perform processing to acquire the general pattern determination information and store it in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the general pattern determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. If the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal is not input, the current first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (three prize ball counter) for the first starting port used for prize balls and updating it.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-3. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-4, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port of this time Terminate the detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved special symbol number (U1) and stores it in step S230-4, and stores the special symbol indicating the first reserved special symbol number (U1) in step S230-5. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the first pending icon and the pending number image on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S230-7. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of special symbol display device, the random number for judging the jackpot acquired this time, the random number for judging the special symbol, the random number for judging the reach, and the special figure A process for determining a planned variation pattern is performed based on the random number for variation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S230-7 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and performs this first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 this time (1, or Over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to execute a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of execution of the big win game (makes the player expect the execution of the big win game).

It should be noted that the effect of causing the starting port lamp 14b to emit light in a color corresponding to the light emission color of the pending icon described above constitutes the prefetch effect. Therefore, the holding icon and the starting port lamp 14b can change the color step by step over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols. In the following, the suspended icon whose color has been changed may be referred to as a "changed suspended icon".

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the second starting opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. If the detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if the detection signal has not been input, the current second starting opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting hole used for prize balls and updating it.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being played. If not during the auxiliary game, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if during the auxiliary game, in step S240-4, 1 is added to the second start opening winning ball counter (D) and updated.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-5. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start port Terminate the detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) in step S240-6 and stores it, and in step S240-7 special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the second pending icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information and sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area. Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs preliminary determination processing in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery (not shown), the type of special symbol display device, the random number for judging the jackpot acquired this time, the random number for judging the special symbol, the random number for judging the reach, and the special figure A process for determining a planned variation pattern is performed based on the random number for variation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start-up winning designation command indicating the scheduled variation pattern determined in the preliminary determination process in step S240-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the command to store the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c. 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

As a result, the starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 is started (1, or Over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols, it is possible to execute a look-ahead performance that foretells the possibility of execution of the big win game (makes the player expect the execution of the big win game). It should be noted that the look-ahead effect using the hold icon and the starting hole lamp 14b can be executed, for example, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 15 in a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data=0, the processing is shifted to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data=1. If so, the process is moved to special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is moved to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot The processing is shifted to the game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data=4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot game end processing (step S350).

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, big hit determination processing, special symbol determination processing for determining the special symbols to be fixed and displayed, and variation time determination processing for determining the variation time of the special symbols are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed is performed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a process of shifting to a special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing, and terminates the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, along with performing the process corresponding to the special symbols (jackpot symbol, losing symbol) displayed fixed and stopped, time-saving game times (J), time-saving game flags, high-probability game times (X), high-probability game flags is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process, and ends the current special figure special electric control process. Specifically, a process of controlling the jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game end processing, and ends the current special figure special electric control processing. Specifically, a high probability game state or a probability game state of a low probability game state is determined, and a process of determining a game state of a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state is performed. . Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed (special symbol time counter = 0), The process moves to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. to move. Note that affirming the process of step S310-2 corresponds to "satisfaction of the starting condition".

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol reservation number (U2) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move to 1. Note that affirming the processing of step S310-4 corresponds to "satisfaction of the starting condition".

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol reservation number (U1) to update it, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination information retention storage area corresponding to the special symbol retention number (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Perform information shift (storage area shift). Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored one before shift to the Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous special symbol variation display already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is preferentially subtracted from the first special symbol reservation number (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order of winning the starting port. The number of reservations (U1) and the number of second special design reservations (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of first special design reservations (U1) is preferentially subtracted over the number of second special design reservations (U2). You may make it

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a receives a special symbol indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. A symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in a performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the number of the first pending icon or the second pending icon displayed on the image display device 31 is reduced, the first pending icon, or A process of changing the second reserved icon to the variable icon is performed.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol display device (type of starting port) and the type of special symbol (stop Toku-zu data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S312. Specifically, referring to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), the special symbol execution A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special figure variation stored in the storage area.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 120, and the performance control board 120 performs the processing for executing the variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variable display of the special symbols. .

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of fluctuation, and sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms at S110.

The main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols in step S316. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the display data for variably displaying the special symbol is created by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. By doing so, the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 performs the variable display of the special symbols.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data=1, prepares to move to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state (standby state) in which the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game are not being executed. If there is a customer waiting state flag, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the processing is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

(Jackpot judgment processing of the main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big win. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, the big hit lottery shown in FIG. Referring to the jackpot determination table, if the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure determination information holding storage area, the jackpot shown in FIG. 5 (b) A lottery jackpot determination table is referred to, and whether or not it is a "jackpot" is determined based on the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-2, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-5.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. The type is determined, and stop special figure data corresponding to the determined kind of special jackpot symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

It should be noted that the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not it is a "jackpot symbol" in the special symbol stop processing of FIG. , and is also used to determine the game state after the end of the big win in the big win game ending process of FIG.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the big hit effect symbol designation command corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the type of the big hit special symbol (stop special symbol data) to be fixed and displayed on the effect control board 120 can be grasped.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state when the jackpot is won from the information set in the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and determines the game state when the jackpot is won. is set in the game state buffer. Specifically, if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time saving game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set, 01H is set, If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

The reason why we set the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in the game state buffer separately from the game state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area) is that during the jackpot game Since the high-probability game flag and time-saving game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot after the jackpot, a new This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. For this reason, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, by referring to the game information in the game state buffer after the jackpot is completed, Based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a new game state after the end of the jackpot (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be set.

The main CPU 110a performs a losing symbol determination process in step S311-5. Specifically, with reference to the special symbol determination table for the loss shown in FIG. The kind is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the kind of the determined loss special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for losing corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, End the jackpot determination process. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it becomes possible to grasp the type (stop special symbol data) of the losing special symbol to be determined and stopped displayed in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed in step S320-1. When the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing of this time is terminated, and when the variation time has elapsed, the processing is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a causes the variable display of the special symbols to be fixed and stopped. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbols set in steps S311-2 and S311-5 are displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol. Stop display data for causing the display device 21 to display a fixed stop is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is fixed and stopped on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the big hit determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been determined and stopped to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the design determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs processing for ending the variable effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for the fixed stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 2, prepares to move to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 23, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a determines in step S330-1 whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (is the special symbol time counter=0?). When the symbol stop time has passed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process of this time is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game end determination processing in step S330-2. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the number of time saving games (J) is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the new number of time saving games (J) is "0" determine whether As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set or if the number of time saving games (J) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-3.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high-probability game end determination processing. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, the high-probability game count (X) is updated by subtracting 1, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine whether or not there is As a result, when the high-probability game count (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the number of high-probability games (X) is not "0", the process proceeds directly to step S330-4.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped in the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol in step S330-5. If it is a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot pattern, the process goes to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to move to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 3, and prepares to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs normal game state transition processing. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game count (J) are cleared, and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-9. Specifically, referring to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. A large winning opening mode determining table (“first big winning TBL”, “second big winning TBL”, “third big winning TBL”) corresponding to the kind of big winning game is determined from the table group.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the opening effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game to the special game timer counter, and terminates this special symbol stop process. Specifically, the opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is determined from the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and set in the special game timer counter. It should be noted that the special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Jackpot game processing on the main control board)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the number of round games (R) storage area. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S340-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to S340-6.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the opening time has passed, the process proceeds to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of openings (K), and energization data for energizing the first big prize opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 17c is set, and the above With reference to the large winning opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, the first large winning opening 16 is determined based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of openings (K). Or, the opening time of the second big winning opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 is opened.

The main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing in step S340-5. Specifically, when the number of opening times (K) is "1", that is, when a round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is stored in the main RAM 110c for effect transmission data. Set to area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs the process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is a period after all preset round games are completed. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S340-18, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is set. If the big winning opening is closed, the process goes to step S340-8, and if the big winning opening is not closed, the process goes to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4 to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the big winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the big winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches a specified number (9) or the opening time per time in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine whether or not it is established. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 16c or the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17c is cleared, and the opening mode of the big winning opening determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the closing time ( Closing interval time, or one closing time) is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has ended. Specifically, whether or not either the value of the winning ball counter (C) for the big winning opening reaches a specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) reaches the maximum number of openings. determine whether If one round has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12, and if one round has not been completed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of openings (K) and the winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) has reached the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games played, the process moves to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process moves to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores it, and ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games played (R), and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , The type of special game (long winning game, short winning game, development winning game) is determined, and an ending designation command corresponding to the type of big winning game is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for executing the ending effect of the big winning game is performed by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

At step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined at step S330-9. set.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S340-18. When the ending time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-19, and when the ending time has not passed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 4, prepares to move to the big winning game end processing shown in FIG. 24, and ends the current big winning game processing.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer in step S350-1.

The main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing in step S350-2. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information, whether to shift to the high probability game state at the end of the jackpot game If it is determined whether to shift to the high probability game state, a high probability game flag indicating that it is in the high probability game state is set in the high probability game flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", a high probability game flag is set.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the set data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game state information, it is the number of times of variable display that can be executed in the high probability game state. A high-probability game number (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game number (X) is set in a high-probability game number (X) storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process in step S350-4. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 7, based on the loaded stop special figure data and game information, it is determined whether to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game. When it determines and makes it shift to a time saving game state, the time saving game flag which shows that it is a time saving game state is set to the time saving game flag storage area.

The main CPU 110a performs time-saving game count determination processing in step S350-5. Specifically, referring to the setting data table at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the number of time-saving games (J) storage area.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a identifies the game state by checking the presence or absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, and sends a game state designation command indicating the identified game state to the effect transmission data storage area. set. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to 0, prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Public power control processing of the main control board)
Using FIG. 25, the normal/universal power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the normal pattern normal electric processing data, and if the normal pattern general electric processing data = 0, the process shifts to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the normal pattern normal electric processing data If =1, the process is shifted to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

This "general and general electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the general and general electric control processing as will be described later, so that the necessary subroutines are appropriately processed in the progress of the game. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process, and terminates the current normal pattern normal electric control process. Specifically, hit determination processing, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, processing for displaying the normal symbols in a stopped state, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process, and terminates the current general/universal electric power control process. Specifically, the process of controlling the auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Normal pattern variation processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-9, and when the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more in step S410-2. When the normal design reserved number (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and when the normal design reserved number (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal design variation process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the number of reserved normal symbols (G) to update it, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area. Specifically, each normal figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit from the first storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal pattern execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous normal symbol fluctuation display that has already been written in the general figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, referring to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 11(a), it is determined whether or not the hit is based on the game state and the hit determination random number value stored in the normal pattern execution storage area. .

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, referring to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11(b), based on the current time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the obtained random number for normal symbol determination, stop display. The normal pattern (stop normal pattern data) is determined, the determined stop normal pattern data is set in the stop normal pattern data storage area, and the normal pattern designation command corresponding to the stop normal pattern data is stored in the main RAM 110c as performance transmission data. Set to area. Thereby, the general pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the stop general pattern data can be grasped in the production control board 120. - 特許庁

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol variation time determination processing. Specifically, referring to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A symbol variation time is determined and set in a normal symbol time counter, and a normal symbol variation designation command corresponding to the normal symbol variation time is set in a performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal pattern fluctuation specification command is transmitted to the production control board 120, and the production control board 120 can usually grasp the fluctuation time of the pattern.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts variable display of normal symbols, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. Specifically, the variable display data of normal symbols are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the display data for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 22 is generated in the above step S600, and the generated data is output in step S700, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays normal symbols. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the variation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S410-10.

The main CPU 110a stops the variable display of normal symbols in step S410-10. Specifically, the variable display data set in step S410-8 is cleared, and the stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal design set in step S410-6 on the normal design display device 22 is used as the main display data. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal pattern data set in the stop normal pattern data storage area is a winning normal pattern. If it is a winning normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a winning normal symbol, this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets normal/universal electrical processing data=1, prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 27, and performs opening mode determination processing in step S410-13. Specifically, referring to the start opening mode determination table shown in FIG. Determines the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game to the auxiliary game timer counter, and terminates this normal symbol variation process. It should be noted that the auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently opening. If it is during the opening, the process moves to step S420-2, and if it is not during the opening, the process moves to S420-4.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has passed in step S420-2. If the opening time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has passed, the process proceeds to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start opening opening process, and ends the current auxiliary game process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), and energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is set. Set the opening time of the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If it is during the ending, the process moves to step S420-12, and if it is not during the ending, the process moves to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening/closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process proceeds to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process proceeds to step S420-7.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-6. If the closing time has not elapsed, the current auxiliary processing is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S420-3 to open the second starting port 15. FIG.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second start opening winning ball counter (D) reaches a specified number (10) or the opening time per time in the number of openings (S) elapses. is established. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second starting port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends in step S420-9. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port has reached the maximum number of times of opening. If the auxiliary game is to be terminated, the process proceeds to step S420-10, and if the auxiliary game is not to be terminated, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of opening times (S) and the second start opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 to the auxiliary game timer counter.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-12. If the ending time has passed, the process proceeds to step S420-13, and if the ending time has not passed, the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the normal pattern normal electric processing data, prepares to shift the processing to the normal pattern variation processing shown in FIG. 26, and ends the current auxiliary game processing.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Processing executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control section 120m will be described. First, the main processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing main processing in the effect control section 120m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs initialization processing in step S1000. In this processing, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b in response to power-on, and performs processing to initialize and set flags stored in the sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a performs sub random number update processing in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the effect control section 120m. In addition, although not shown, a clock pulse is generated every predetermined period (2 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120m, and a timer interrupt processing program is read, and the effect control board timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG.

In addition, when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the effect control unit 120m generates a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown), and stores the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters used in the effect control section 120m.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the cross button detection switch 36b have been input. Effect input control processing for transmitting effect button signals and the like to the voice control unit 150 is performed.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the lamp/drive control section 160 and the display/sound control section 150. FIG.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of production control unit)
Next, the command analysis processing of the effect control section 120m will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing (1) in the effect control unit 120m, and FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing (2) in the effect control unit 120m. Command analysis processing (2) is performed subsequent to command analysis processing (1).

The sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer in step S1401 to determine whether or not a command has been received. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if the command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1402 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1403, and if it is not a special symbol storage specification command, the process moves to step S1404.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 120a performs pending storage update processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, the number of reserved memories is analyzed from the received special symbol memory designation command, and processing such as setting the analyzed reserved memory number to the reserved memory number counter of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting entry winning designation command. If it is the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1405, and if it is not the starting opening winning designation command, the process is moved to step S1406.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 120a performs icon change effect determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the content of the received start-up winning designation command, processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario is performed.

Note that the icon change effect corresponds to the effect using the above-described pending icon and the starting port lamp 14b.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If it is the production design designation command, the process is moved to step S1407, and if it is not the production design designation command, the process is moved to step S1408.

The sub CPU 120a performs basic symbol data determination processing in step S1407, and ends the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received performance design designation command, the presence or absence of the jackpot, the basic pattern data (first to third jackpot pattern data, losing pattern data) that can identify the type of the jackpot. process.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1408 whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process proceeds to step S1409, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process proceeds to step S1412.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 120a performs variation effect pattern determination processing. Specifically, based on the contents of the received variable pattern designation command, a variable performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variable performance to be executed using various production devices, is determined, and the determined variable performance pattern is performed. A process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variable effect pattern command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/drive control unit 160, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 120a performs icon display mode update processing. Specifically, the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon displayed on the image display device 31 is updated based on the change scenario determined in the above-described icon change effect determination process and the determined variable effect pattern. Then, the processing for executing the icon change effect is performed.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot announcement effect determination process. Specifically, based on the determined variable performance pattern, processing for determining the presence or absence of the big-hit announcement performance, the type of the big-hit announcement performance to be executed, and the like is performed. The details of this jackpot announcement effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

It should be noted that the jackpot announcement effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed as a result of the variable effect being executed (expecting that the jackpot game will be executed), or the result of the jackpot determination. It is a production that suggests.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the pattern confirmation command. If it is a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1413, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step S1414.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol determination stop processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, in order to perform the fixed stop display of the effect pattern 38, a process of setting a stop designation command for the fixed stop display of the effect pattern to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for finalizing and stopping display of the variable effect is performed.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process moves to step S1415, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process moves to step S1416.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 120a performs game state setting processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, a process of specifying the current game state by referring to the received game state designation command and setting data indicating the specified game state in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c is performed.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If it is an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1417, and if it is not an opening specifying command, the process moves to step S1418.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 120a performs opening effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect to be performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the opening effect designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. conduct. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round specifying command, the process moves to step S1419, and if there is no round specifying command, the process moves to step S1420.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the round designating command, the effect pattern of the round effect performed during the round game is determined, and the process of setting the round effect designating command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If it is an ending specifying command, the process moves to step S1421, and if it is not an ending specifying command, the process moves to step S1422.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs jackpot end effect pattern determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the processing of setting the ending designation command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. . As a result, the command specifying the ending effect is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S1422, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the command is a customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1423, and if it is not a customer waiting state designation command, the current command analysis processing is terminated.

In step S1423, the sub CPU 120a performs customer waiting effect determination processing, and terminates the current command analysis processing. Specifically, based on the customer waiting state specifying command, the customer waiting effect to be performed in the customer waiting state (customer waiting period) is determined, and the customer waiting effect specifying command corresponding to the determined customer waiting effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 120c. Perform processing to set in the buffer. As a result, the command specifying the customer waiting effect is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed.

(Variation effect pattern determination process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control section 120m will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control unit 120m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1441-1, and selects a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 33) in step S1441-2.

In step S1441-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table, and determines one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). . The details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1441-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variable effect pattern specifying command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a variable effect pattern. In the variable performance pattern determination table, the variable performance pattern designation command, the allocation ratio (%) for each variable performance pattern, and the determined variable performance pattern are associated, and as a reference, the performance configuration for each variable performance pattern. is described.

The variation production pattern is a variation performed using the production devices such as the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the board drive device 33, the board lighting device 34a, the frame lighting device 34b, the production button 35, and the cross button 36. It is the effect mode of the effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous notice, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc. are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 will be explained.

“Normal fluctuation” means that a normal fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win state is not formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation performance is performed in which the variation time is shorter than that of the normal variation performance and the ready-to-win state is not formed by the performance pattern 38. - 特許庁
"Normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect in which a reach state is formed by the effect pattern 38 is performed.
"SP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and an SP ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal ready-to-win effect is performed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that a ready-to-win state is formed by the effect pattern 38, and SPSP ready-to-win effect with higher expectation for big hit than SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

``Failure to inflate a pattern'' indicates that the inflection performance is executed to determine whether or not a ready-to-win state is formed by the left and right performance symbols 38, but ultimately the ready-to-win state is not formed.
'Successful pattern fanning' means that the fanning performance is executed to determine whether or not the ready-to-win state is formed by the left and right performance symbols 38, and finally the ready-to-win state is formed.

"Pseudo-continuous failure" indicates that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is executed or not, but ultimately the result is that the pseudo-continuous advance notice is not executed.
"Pseudo-continuous success" indicates that a stimulating effect is executed to determine whether or not the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed, and finally the pseudo-continuous advance notice will be executed.
“Pseudo continuous success after reach” indicates that the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the reach state is formed.

"Button non-collision" means that an operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and in this operation promoting effect, the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is pressed. When the validity period elapses, a winning/losing informing performance for informing whether or not a big win is achieved is executed, but the performance button 35 does not move upward and is maintained in a non-protruding state (normal state) during the validity period of this operation promoting performance. It indicates that
"Button hit" means that an operation promoting effect to prompt the operation of the effect button 35 is executed in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, and in this operation promoting effect, the effect button 35 is operated or the effect button 35 is activated. When the period elapses, a win/lose notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the player has won a big win. During the effective period of this operation promotion effect, the effect button 35 moves upward to indicate a projecting state (special state). ing.

In this embodiment, for example, as an operation device to be operated by the player in the final phase (final stage) of the corresponding ready-to-win effect, the effect button 35 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, other operating means may be provided in addition to the effect button 35 . Specifically, an effect lever may be provided.
The production lever may be provided integrally with the production button 35, or may be provided separately.
In the case of providing a production lever, it may be easier to select the production lever operation rather than the production button 35 in the final phase (final stage) of the ready-to-win production corresponding to the big win.
In other words, "non-pressing button" may be read as "effect button 35", and "pressing button" may be read as "effect lever".

The "resurrection effect" means that a failure is once reported in the final phase (final stage) of the SP reach or SP reach, and then the first decorative member 33a or the second decorative member is displayed during the temporary stop display period before the fixed stop display. 33b is actuated to notify a jackpot in reverse.

A "specific image" is an image displayed on the image display device 31 after notifying a failure in SP reach or higher, and in particular, SP reach or SPSP reach is performed from the background image on which SP reach or SPSP reach is performed. This is an image displayed on the image display device 31 when switching to the previous background image.
It should be noted that the "specific image" is always displayed if the SP reach of the loser or more, and in the case of a big hit, it is displayed if it is a variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern 30) that performs a "resurrection effect". It is designed to be
That is, the "specific image" has the characteristic that a variable performance pattern with SP reach or more for losing is more likely to be displayed than a variable performance pattern with SP reach or more for big win.
A display example of the "specific image" will be described in detail later using animation diagrams.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The higher the number of executions, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed or the number of times the pseudo continuous notice is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a second feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that when the button 35 is in a special state, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the effect button 35 will be in the special state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Note that when the effect button 35 is in the normal state, a “first operation prompting image” is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation prompting image prompting the user to operate the effect button 35 (for example, “first operation prompt image” in FIG. 62). operation prompting image”), and when the effect button 35 is in a special state, a “second operation prompting image” is displayed on the image display device 31 as an operation prompting image for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (for example, See “Second operation prompting image” in FIG. 62).

(Jackpot announcement production decision processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 120m will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination process in the effect control section 120m.

First, in step S1443-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the determined variable effect pattern, and in step S1443-2, uses the pre-reach announcement determination table (see FIG. 35) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reach announcement effect. and a notice pattern in which the type of pre-reach notice effect to be executed is determined. The details of this pre-reach advance notice determination table will be described later using FIG. 35 .

In step S1443-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a dialog notice effect. In the case of the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process is moved to step S1443-4, and in the case of the announcement pattern not to execute the dialogue announcement effect, the process is moved to step S1443-6.

In addition, the dialogue forewarning effect means that the image display device 31 displays a dialogue suggesting the degree of expectation for the big win based on the operation of the performance button 35, and the audio output device 32 outputs a sound corresponding to the dialogue. It is one of the

In step S1443-4, the sub CPU 120a determines a dialogue pattern, which is the effect mode of the dialogue preview effect, using the dialogue pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(a)) and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. The details of this dialogue pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for designating a speech announcement effect corresponding to the determined speech pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the command for designating the dialog preview effect is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the dialog preview effect is performed.

In step S1443-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect (SU notice effect). If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-9.

In addition, the step-up notice effect is a predetermined number of steps from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage) according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, until one of the plurality of steps (stages). It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect that executes step effects in order. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step S1443-7, the sub CPU 120a uses the step-up pattern determination table (see FIG. 36(b)) to determine the step-up pattern, which is the effect mode of the step-up notice effect, and store it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. The details of this step-up pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1443-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a step-up notice effect designation command corresponding to the determined step-up pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the step-up notice effect specification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the step-up notice effect is performed.

In step S1443-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the roulette notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the roulette notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-10, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the roulette notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-12.

In addition, the roulette notice effect is to display a plurality of selection icons, rotate the cursor image on the plurality of selection icons, and stop the cursor image on one of the selection icons after a predetermined time has elapsed ( It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which any one selection icon is selected) and the effect indicated by the selected selection icon is executed. For example, when the selection icon "SP" is selected, "SP reach" is executed. In addition, it is easier to select, for example, a selection icon such as ``hot heat'' or ``rainbow'' when a jackpot game is executed (higher expectations for a jackpot game) than when a jackpot game is not executed. .

In step S1443-10, the sub CPU 120a uses the roulette pattern determination table (see FIG. 37(c)) to determine the roulette pattern and the selected icon, which are the effect mode of the roulette advance notice effect, and the predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set to The details of this roulette pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 37(c).

In step S1443-11, the sub CPU 120a sets a roulette advance notice designation command corresponding to the determined roulette pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the command for designating the roulette notice effect is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and processing for executing the roulette notice effect is performed.

In step S1443-12, the sub CPU 120a uses the in-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 38(a)) to determine whether or not to execute the in-reach notice effect and the type of in-reach notice effect to be executed. to decide. Details of this in-reach announcement determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-13 whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the character group notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the character group notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-14, and if it is the notice pattern for not executing the character group notice effect, the process moves to step S1443-16.

Note that the character group forewarning effect is one type of big win forewarning effect in which one of a plurality of types of characters with different degrees of expectation for big wins is displayed as a group on the image display device 31 .

In step S1443-14, the sub CPU 120a uses the character group pattern determination table (see FIG. 38(b)) to determine the character group pattern, which is the effect mode of the character group advance notice effect, and store it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c. set. The details of this character group pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38(b).

In step S1443-15, the sub CPU 120a sets a character group preview effect designating command corresponding to the determined character group pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the character group advance notice effect specification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 150 and the lamp/driving control unit 160, and the character group advance notice effect is executed.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1443-16 whether or not the determined notice pattern is the notice pattern for executing the decorative member notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the decoration member notice effect, the process is shifted to step S1443-17, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the decoration member notice effect, this big win notice effect determination processing is ended.

Note that the decorative member advance notice effect is one kind of big win notice effect in which the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are moved from the initial position to the operating position. Specifically, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b operate from the initial position to the operating position when the jackpot game is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher) than when the jackpot game is not executed. The number of times to do it is easy to increase.

In step S1443-17, the sub CPU 120a determines the number of operations of the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b in the decorative member advance notice effect using the decorative member operation count determination table (see FIG. 38(c)). is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 120c. The details of the decorative member operation frequency determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38(c).

In step S1443-18, the sub CPU 120a sets a decorative member advance notice designation command corresponding to the determined number of operations in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current jackpot advance notice effect determination processing.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table referred to when determining a notice pattern of a pre-reach notice. The pre-reach advance notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each advance notice pattern, and the advance notice pattern to be determined.

The notice pattern of the notice before the reach is "no notice" in which the notice before the reach is not executed, "advance notice" in which the dialogue notice is executed, "step up notice" in which the step-up notice is executed, and roulette notice Four types of "roulette notice effect" are set to execute the effect, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is as follows: no notice<serif notice effect<roulette notice effect<step-up notice effect.

The characteristics of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 35 are that the pre-reach notice is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and there is a variation production pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big win. There is a point that the pre-reach announcement is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the pre-reach notice shown in FIG. 35 is merely an example, and a pre-reach notice (not shown) may be provided.

(Dialog pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing a dialogue pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialogue pattern. The speech pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each speech pattern, and the speech pattern to be decided.

The dialogue pattern includes "normal dialogue" in which it is unknown whether or not a jackpot game will be executed, "reach confirmation dialogue" in which it is confirmed that the reach production will be executed, and that the reach production will be executed. Along with confirmation, four categories are set: "Expectation UP Dialogue" that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed, and "Accurate Dialogue (Premium)" that confirms that a big win will occur. , and the degree of expectation for a big hit is normal lines < line for fixed reach < line for UP expectation < line for sure (big hit confirmed).

As a feature of the speech pattern determination table shown in FIG. Lines) are easier to determine, and when a variable pattern with a high expectation for a big hit is decided, than when a variable pattern with a low expectation for a big hit is decided, the line (reach One of the points is that it is easy to determine fixed lines, expectations UP lines, and accurate lines. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Step-up pattern determination table)
FIG. 36(b) shows a step-up pattern determination table referred to when determining a step-up pattern. The step-up pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern type, the allocation ratio (%) for each step-up pattern, and the determined step-up pattern.

The step-up patterns include "Normal SU1" in which the first step effect is executed, "Normal SU2" in which the first and second step effects are executed, and "Normal SU2" in which the first to third step effects are executed. SU3", 1st to 4th step effects are executed "Normal SU4", 1st to 5th step effects are executed "Normal SU5", 1st to 5th step effects are executed and a jackpot game is performed. There are six types of "probable SU5 (premium)" that are determined to be executed, and the expected degree of jackpot is normal SU1<normal SU2<normal SU3<normal SU4<normal SU5<possible SU5.

As a feature of the step-up pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36(b), a step-up pattern with a large number of step performance executions is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, resulting in a big win. A step-up pattern with a large number of executions of step effects is more likely to be determined when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is determined. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Roulette pattern determination table)
FIG. 37(c) is a diagram showing a roulette pattern determination table referred to when determining a roulette pattern and selection icons. The roulette pattern determination table is associated with a jackpot lottery result, a variation effect pattern type, a distribution ratio (%) for each roulette pattern, a roulette pattern to be determined, and a selection icon.

The roulette patterns include "roulette pattern 1" with selection icons "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow", and selection icons with "?", "SP", "heat", Two types of "roulette pattern 2" consisting of "hot heat" and "rainbow" are set, and the degree of expectation for a big win is roulette pattern 1<roulette pattern 2.

The characteristic of the roulette pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37(c) is that the roulette pattern 2 is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result, and there is a variation effect pattern with a low expectation for a big win. One of the points is that selection icons such as “hot heat” and “rainbow” are more likely to be selected when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when it is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Preliminary decision table during reach)
FIG. 38(a) is a diagram showing an in-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining an in-reach announcement announcement pattern. The jackpot lottery result, variation effect pattern type, distribution ratio (%) for each notice pattern, and decided notice pattern are associated with the in-reach notice determination table.

There are three types of notice patterns for reach notice: "No notice", where the reach notice is not executed, "Character group notice effect", where the character group notice effect is executed, and "Decorative material notice effect", where the decoration component notice effect is executed. Three types are set, and the expected jackpot is no notice <decorative member notice effect <character group notice effect.

The feature of the in-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 38(a) is that in the case of a big win, the in-reach notice (character group notice effect) is more likely to be executed than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and It is easier to execute the notice during reach (character group notice effect) when a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is decided than when a variable effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit is decided. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the in-reach notice shown in FIG. 38 is merely an example, and an in-reach notice (not shown) may be provided.

(Character group pattern determination table)
FIG. 38(b) is a diagram showing a character group pattern determination table referred to when determining a character group pattern. The character group pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, the distribution ratio (%) for each character group pattern, and the character group pattern to be determined.

The character group pattern includes "first character group" in which the first character group is displayed, "second character group" in which the second character group is displayed, and "third character group" in which the third character group is displayed. , "4th character group (premier)" where the 4th character group is displayed and it is confirmed that it will be a big hit. Third character group<fourth character group (big hit confirmed).

A feature of the character group pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38(b) is that it is determined that a variable effect pattern equal to or higher than the SP ready-to-win effect will be executed when the character group announcement effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the character group announcement effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Decorative member operation count determination table)
FIG. 38(c) is a diagram showing a decorative member operation frequency determination table referred to when determining the number of times to operate the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b. The number of operations for each variation effect pattern is associated with the decorative member operation number determination table.
For example, the variable effect pattern that finally executes the SP ready-to-win effect is associated with "1" as the number of operations, and the variable effect pattern that finally executes the SPSP ready-to-win effect is associated with "1" as the number of operations. " or "2" are associated, and "3" is associated as the number of operations with the variable effect pattern for finally executing the all-rotation ready-to-win effect.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern for finally executing the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the distribution is such that the number of operations "1" is more likely to be selected at the time of losing, and the number of operations "2" is more likely to be selected at the time of the big win.
That is, the degree of expectation for a big win is 1 operation<2 operations<3 operations (big win confirmed).

As a feature of the decorative member operation count determination table shown in FIG. For example, it is confirmed that the variable effect pattern is executed. Also, if the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are activated three times, a big win is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the expectation of the player as to whether or not the decoration member announcement effect will be executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit 151)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 151. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 152, and the supervising CPU 152 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 152 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. In this process, the supervising CPU 152 reads the main processing program from the supervising ROM 153, initializes flags and the like stored in the supervising RAM 154, and performs processing such as initial setting.

The supervising CPU 152 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 154 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 120m. If it is not received (step T4: No), the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received (step T4: Yes), in step T5, it corresponds to the received effect instruction command. An animation pattern setting process is performed for determining and setting an animation pattern from a type of animation group. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 .

The production instruction command includes a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 38, an icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon and the variable icon, and a variable production animation such as the background and characters. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 152 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag (step T7: No), the process proceeds to step T4. If there is a frame switching flag (step T7: Yes), the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T 9 , the supervising CPU 152 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 155 .

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 31, and is generated for each frame (frame update timing) of one unit or a plurality of units. , in this embodiment, a display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 152 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control section 155 to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 155 draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the image display device 31 displays the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer. I do.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 152 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 158. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 32. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 152 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 158 to output sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 158 outputs sounds based on the sound list from the sound output device 32 .

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 32 so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 155, and are also synchronized (synchronized) with the frame update timing. 32 is terminated.

Although the output of various sounds from the audio output device 32 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 32 does not synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 152 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command Reception Interrupt Processing of Integrated Control Unit 151)
The command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(a) is a flowchart showing the command reception interruption process of the integrated control section 151, and the command reception interruption process is executed by receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control section 120m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 152 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 120m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 120m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 154 is performed. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit 151)
V-blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(b). FIG. 40(b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 151. In the V blank interrupt processing, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 155 ends (1/30 It is executed each time (1/30th of a second = approximately 33 ms) a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 152 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"). On the other hand, frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 157 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 152 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Animation pattern setting process of general control unit 151)
The animation pattern setting process of the general control unit 151 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing animation pattern setting processing of the overall control unit 151 .

First, in step T5-1, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a customer waiting effect command. -3, if it is a customer waiting effect command (step T5-1: Yes), in step T5-2, the customer waiting animation pattern is displayed from the customer waiting group for displaying the customer waiting animation. A customer waiting animation pattern setting process to be determined and set is performed.

In step T5-3, supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an icon display pattern command. If not (step T5-3: No), step T5-5. If it is an icon display pattern command (step T5-3: Yes), in step T5-4, an icon animation pattern is selected from the icon group for displaying the animation of the pending icon or the animation of the variable icon. icon animation pattern setting processing is performed.

The supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a variable effect pattern command in step T5-5, and if it is not a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: No), step T5-7. If it is a variable effect pattern command (step T5-5: Yes), in step T5-6, a variable effect animation pattern is selected from the variable effect group for displaying background animation and character animation. A variable effect animation pattern setting process to be determined and set is performed.

The supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a pattern stop pattern command in step T5-7, and if it is not a pattern stop pattern command (step T5-7: No), step T5-9. If it is a pattern stop pattern command (step T5-7: Yes), in step T5-8, the pattern animation from the production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern and the animation of the fourth pattern A pattern animation pattern setting process for determining and setting a pattern is performed.

In step T5-9, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an advance notice effect pattern command, and if not (step T5-9: No), step T5-11. , and if it is a notice effect pattern command (step T5-9: Yes), in step T5-10, a notice effect group for displaying a notice effect in preparation for the possibility of a big win. A notice effect animation pattern setting process for determining and setting a notice effect animation pattern from is performed.

The supervising CPU 152 determines in step T5-11 whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation prompting pattern command. If it is not an operation prompting pattern command (step T5-11: No), step T5-13 If it is an operation promotion pattern command (step T5-11: Yes), in step T5-12, the operation promotion group for displaying the operation promotion effect prompting the operation of the production button 35 is changed to the operation promotion pattern command. An operation-promoting animation pattern setting process for determining and setting an animation pattern is performed.

In step T5-13, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an operation effect pattern command. If it is an operation effect pattern command (step T5-13: Yes), in step T5-14, an operation effect animation pattern is determined and set from the operation effect group for displaying the operation effect. Operation effect animation pattern setting processing is performed.

In step T5-15, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is the opening effect pattern command, and if not the opening effect pattern command (step T5-15: No), step T5-17. If it is an opening effect pattern command (step T5-15: Yes), in step T5-16, an opening effect animation pattern is determined and set from the opening effect group for displaying the opening effect. Execute opening effect animation pattern setting processing.

In step T5-17, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is a round effect pattern command, and if not (step T5-17: No), step T5-19. If it is a round effect pattern command (step T5-17: Yes), in step T5-18, a round effect animation pattern is determined and set from the round effect group for displaying the round effect. A round production animation pattern setting process is performed.

In step T5-19, the supervising CPU 152 determines whether or not the received effect instruction command is an ending effect pattern command. When the setting process is terminated and it is an ending effect pattern command (step T5-19: Yes), in step T5-20, an ending effect animation pattern is determined from the ending effect group for displaying the ending effect and set. Ending production animation pattern determination processing is performed, and the current animation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Next, the first characteristic portion of the specific image will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. FIG.

FIG. 42 is a time chart 1 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), (a) shows details of the variable effect pattern 1, and (b) shows details of the variable effect pattern 5. , and (c) shows details of the variation effect pattern 7 .

In FIG. 42 , “effect pattern (effect pattern 38)”, “small effect pattern (small effect pattern 38d)”, “reserved pattern (reserved number image described above)”, “specific image (Specific image 31e to be described later)” shows details for each variation effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the variable effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, the "effect pattern" is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction, and the player can visually recognize the state of the scrolling display.
Also, at this time, the "effect pattern" is scroll-displayed in the vertical direction in the first display mode.
The "first display mode" is the normal display mode (default display mode) of the "effect pattern". For example, as shown in FIG. (composed of the first component and the second component described above). In addition to the "first display mode", it has a "second display mode" (configured with the above-described second component) composed only of numerical patterns, and in the variable effect pattern 7 etc. described later , can be changed between the "first display mode" and the "second display mode" during the variable display.

Further, when the variable display is started, the "small effect symbols" are vertically scroll-displayed, and the player can visually recognize the state of the scroll-display.
It should be noted that the ``small effect pattern'' does not have the ``first display mode'' and the ``second display mode'' like the ``effect pattern'', and the display mode is unchanged regardless of the variable effect pattern. . For example, as shown in FIG. 43, etc., it is composed only of number patterns, and character patterns are not attached. In addition, it is always displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 31, and the display position, size, color and design do not change during the variable presentation.

Further, even when the variable display is started, the "reserved symbol" is still displayed, and the player can visually recognize the displayed "reserved symbol".
For example, as shown in FIG. 43 and the like, "2" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 31c, which is the "second storage unit" of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. ” indicates that the first special figure determination information is stored. In addition, "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d, which is in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area in FIG. It shows that the second special figure determination information is not stored.
That is, the "reserved design" can display any number from "0" to "4" in the first special design reservation number display area 31c and the second special design reservation number display area 31d. ” is displayed, either the state in which the special figure determination information is not stored in the “0th storage unit” or the state in which the special figure determination information is stored only in the “0th storage unit” , "1" to "4" indicate the state in which the special figure determination information is stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" respectively.

Further, even if the variable display is started, the "specific image" is not displayed and the player cannot visually recognize the "specific image". In the effect configuration column of FIG. 33, in the variable effect pattern including the "specific image", the "specific image" is displayed for "2S" immediately before reaching the temporary stop display period.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is the "temporary stop display period", after finishing the vertical scroll display, at the predetermined stop position, It is possible to see the state that it is swaying slightly.

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
That is, the "small effect symbol" is not displayed with a small fluctuation like the "effect symbol" during the "temporary stop display period", but is continuously displayed in the vertical direction even during the "temporary stop display period". is to be performed.

Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed and cannot be visually recognized continuously (hereinafter simply referred to as "not displayed").

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" can still be visually recognized in the "first display mode", but since it is the "fixed stop display period", after finishing the display that fluctuates slightly, at the predetermined stop position, it is completely displayed. It is possible to see the state of the stop display.

Also, at this timing, the "small effect pattern" is still visible, but since it is the "fixed stop display period", after finishing the vertical scroll display, "left", "middle", "right" It is possible to see how the “small effect pattern” composed of the patterns is stopped and displayed at the same time.

Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable effect Pattern 1 is ended (one game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is a variable effect pattern 5, and each aspect of the "ordinary variable period" up to timing (b) T1, "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "holding pattern", and "specific image" , Since it is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" of the fluctuation effect pattern 1 described above, the explanation is omitted.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since it is the "normal reach fluctuation period", for example, the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c are the same character pattern. Temporary stop display is performed by the + number design, and it is possible to visually recognize a state (reach state) in which the medium effect design 38b is scrolled in the vertical direction.

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
That is, the "small production pattern" does not form a reach state like the "production pattern" in the "normal reach fluctuation period", but continues even in the "normal reach fluctuation period", "left", "middle" , and the "right" pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction.

Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" is still visible in the "first display mode", but since the "temporary stop display period" follows the "normal reach fluctuation period", the vertical scroll display is finished. For example, "5" pattern (left effect pattern 38a), "6" pattern (middle effect pattern 38b), and "5" pattern (right effect pattern 38c) are swaying slightly at a predetermined stop position. It is possible.

In addition, each aspect of "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" at timing (b) T2, "temporary stop display period" from timing (b) T2 to timing (b) T3 " Each aspect of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image", timing (b) T3 "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", "specific image" Each aspect, "effect symbol", "small effect symbol", "hold symbol", "specific image" in the "fixed stop display period" from timing (b) T3 to timing (b) T4, Since this pattern is the same as the variation effect pattern 1 described above, the description is omitted.
Then, when the timing (b) T4 is reached, the variable effect pattern 5 ends (one game ends).

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is a variable production pattern 7, and the "production pattern", "small production pattern", "normal fluctuation period" and "normal reach fluctuation period" from timing (c) T1 to timing (c) T2, Since each aspect of the "holding symbol" and the "specific image" is the same as the "normal fluctuation period" and the "normal reach fluctuation period" of the above-described fluctuation effect pattern 5, the explanation is omitted.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" forming the ready-to-win state becomes invisible due to the background image.
The background image includes a white-out image, a black-out image, and a shielding image (door image, fusuma image, etc.).

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
In other words, the "small effect pattern" does not become invisible like the "effect pattern" when the "background switch" is performed, but the vertical scroll display is continuously visible even when the "background switch" is performed. It's like

Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, the "effect pattern" can be visually recognized in the "second display mode". In the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "SP SP reach fluctuation period", the content of the reach effect (for example, the confrontation effect between character images, etc.) is mainly to be visually recognized by the player, so the "second display mode" Then, only numeric patterns are displayed in the corners of the display area of the image display device 31 in a smaller display size than the ready-to-reach state in the "first display mode".

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
In addition, as described above, the display mode of the "small effect symbol" does not change even in the "SP reach fluctuation period".

Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" is visible in the "second display mode", and the middle effect pattern 38b that has been scroll-displayed is a number pattern different from the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c. Temporary stop display is performed at .

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing of ending the "SP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "effect pattern" becomes invisible due to the display of the specific image.

Also, at this timing, the “small effect pattern” continues to be visually recognizably scrolled in the vertical direction.
Also, at this timing, the "reserved design" is still visible.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.
That is, in the "background switching" of the timing, the "specific image", the "small effect symbol", and the "hold symbol" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 31 so as to be visible.

These modes of "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing of ending the "background switching" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, by erasing the "specific image", the "effect pattern" can again be visually recognized in the "first display mode".

In addition, each aspect of "small effect symbol", "holding symbol", and "specific image" at timing (c) T6, "temporary stop display period" from timing (c) T6 to timing (c) T7 " Each aspect of "performance design", "small performance design", "reserved design", and "specific image", timing (c) T7 "performance design", "small performance design", "reserved design", "specific image" Each mode, "effect pattern", "small effect pattern", "reserved pattern", "specific image" in the "fixed stop display period" from timing (c) T7 to timing (c) T8, Since this pattern is the same as the variation effect pattern 1 described above, the description is omitted.
Then, when the timing (c) T8 is reached, the variable effect pattern 7 is finished (one game is finished).

Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of FIG. 42, a supplementary explanation will be given using the animation of FIG.
Note that FIG. 43 shows only the image display device 31, and the case of (b) variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is not displayed and the case of (c) variation effect pattern 5 in which the "specific image" is displayed. The case of pattern 7 is described.
Note that the animation in FIG. 43 shows only the main part of the time chart.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 5)
(b) T1 to T2 correspond to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
That is, as the left production pattern 38a, the "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of the character pattern + number pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly shaken), and as the right production pattern 38c, the character pattern + number pattern is displayed. A "5" symbol (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), and the medium effect symbol 38b is vertically scrolled to form a ready-to-win state.

Also, as the background image, a background image imitating a mountain is displayed.
Also, in the lower left corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reserved number display area 31c and a second special symbol reserved number display area 31d are formed, and a reserved number image is displayed.

In addition, at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 31, a small effect pattern 38d consisting of "left", "middle", and "right" patterns is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction.
In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icon display area 31b are displayed, and the variable icon display area 31a has a "○"-shaped pending icon. "1" is displayed, and in the reserved icon display area 31b, the "○" shaped reserved icon is "2" so as to correspond to the reserved number image "2" of the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c. are displayed.

(b) T2 to T3 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
That is, as the left effect pattern 38a, the "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of the character pattern + number pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly swaying), and as the middle effect pattern 38b, the character pattern + number pattern is displayed. The "6" pattern (first display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly swaying), and the "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of the character pattern + number pattern is temporarily stopped as the right effect pattern 38c. showing (slightly swaying).
The other display modes are the same as those of (b) T1 and T2, so the description is omitted.

(b) T3 to T4 correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
That is, as the left effect pattern 38a, the "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of the character pattern and the number pattern is fixed and stopped (completely stopped), and the middle effect pattern 38b is the character pattern and the number pattern. "6" pattern (first display mode) is displayed as a fixed stop (completely stopped), and "5" pattern (first display mode) consisting of a character pattern + number pattern is displayed as a right effect pattern 38c. Fixed stop is displayed (completely stopped).

In addition, the small performance symbols 38d consisting of the symbols "left", "middle" and "right" are simultaneously fixed and displayed as "5", "6" and "5".
In addition, along with the fixed stop display, the “○”-shaped pending icon is erased from the variable icon display area 31a.

(Display example in variation effect pattern 7)
(c) T4 to T5 correspond to the "losing notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "losing notification", as an example, a scene in which a teammate character image is defeated by an enemy character image (showdown effect) is displayed, and an image of "lost" is displayed to indicate that the teammate character image has been defeated.
In addition, as the left effect pattern 38a, a "5" pattern (second display mode) consisting only of number patterns is temporarily stopped and displayed (slightly oscillating), and as the right effect pattern 38c, "5" consisting only of number patterns. The symbol (second display mode) is temporarily stopped (slightly oscillating), and the "6" symbol (second display mode) consisting only of number symbols is temporarily stopped as the medium effect symbol 38b.
In addition, the middle effect pattern 38b is displayed in the center of the display area in a display size larger than the display size of the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c.

Also, as the background image, the background image imitating the mountain that was displayed during the "normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and the background image corresponding to the "showdown effect" is displayed. Thus, during the "SP reach fluctuation period", a background image different from the background image displayed during the "normal fluctuation period" or the "normal reach fluctuation period" is displayed.
Further, in the lower left corner of the image display device 31, a first special symbol reserved number display area 31c and a second special symbol reserved number display area 31d are formed, and a reserved number image is displayed.

Further, at the lower right corner of the image display device 31, a small effect pattern 38d consisting of "left", "middle", and "right" patterns is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction.
In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the time chart of FIG. 42, the variable icon display area 31a and the suspended icon display area 31b are arranged to shift the player's viewpoint to the SP reach performance during the "SP reach fluctuation period". It is not displayed to make you face it. In addition, it is designed not to display from (c) T2 to (c) T6 in FIG.
Even if the variable icon display area 31a and the pending icon display area 31b are hidden in this way, the pending number image is continuously displayed. can be confirmed.

(c) T5 to T6 correspond to "background switching" after the "SP reach fluctuation period".
In the "background switching", a specific image 31e (an image imitating a shutter) is displayed over the entire display area.
Along with the display of the specific image 31e, the effect pattern 38 and the character image become invisible.
However, the reserved number image and the small effect symbol 38d are not blocked by the display of the specific image 31e, and are visible even when the specific image 31e is displayed.

(c) T6 to T7 correspond to the "provisional stop display period", and (c) T7 to T8 correspond to the "fixed stop display period", but the display contents are as follows: (b) T2 to Since it is the same as the content described in T3, the description is omitted.

As in the variable effect pattern 7, when the display mode of the effect pattern, the background image, etc. changes with the execution of the SP reach, By returning to the display mode before execution of the SP reach, it is possible to switch the display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable.
In addition, after the SP reach is notified of the failure, after displaying the specific image 31e, the display mode is returned to the display mode before the execution of the SP reach. It is possible to make the player clearly grasp that the SP reach is finished.

In addition, before the specific image 31e is displayed, the production pattern (number pattern part) at (c) T4 to T5, and after the specific image 31e is displayed, the production pattern (number pattern) at (c) T6 to T7 part) has the following characteristics:
That is, after the specific image 31e is displayed, the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c are larger in display size than before the specific image 31e is displayed. The display size is smaller than before the image 31e is displayed.
This makes it possible to clarify the point (what is displayed as the confrontation effect or the medium effect pattern 38b) that the player wants to visually recognize in the SP reach.
Note that the display size is not limited to this, and can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the medium effect pattern 38b before the specific image 31e is displayed may have the same display size as the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, an example of an effect that can be executed in a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is not displayed but is not executable in a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed (a effect pattern 38 is used) Predetermined effect) will be explained.
In FIG. 44, only the image display device 31 is extracted, and the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, and the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed. Effect pattern 7 is described as an example.
Note that the animation in FIG. 44 shows only the main part of the time chart.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 1)
(a) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction.
Note that the other display elements (holding number image, etc.) are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 43, so description thereof will be omitted.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In this "temporary stop display period", the character patterns forming the production pattern 38 are adapted to perform actions.
Specifically, each character pattern of the left production pattern 38a, the middle production pattern 38b, and the right production pattern 38c raises both hands and then lowers both hands.
By performing such an operation, it is possible to give variation to the normal variation (variation effect pattern 1), which is scarce in variation, leading to an improvement in game interest.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
Note that the display mode in the "fixed stop display period" is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 43, so the description is omitted.
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, during the "temporary stop display period", the action effect using the character pattern can be executed.

(Display example in variation effect pattern 7)
The display example of the variation effect pattern 7 of (c) T4-T5, (c) T5-T6, (c) T6-T7, and (c) T7-T8 in FIG. 44 is the same as the content described in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted, but during (c) the “temporary stop display period” from T6 to T7, the character patterns that make up the effect pattern 38 as described in the variable effect pattern 1 described above are not performed. .
In this way, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the action effect using the character pattern cannot be executed during the "temporary stop display period".
As a result, even though the specific image 31e is displayed to allow the player to clearly understand that the ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win) has ended, the action effect using the character pattern is executed during the "temporary stop display period." This can prevent the player from thinking that the reach effect (SP reach) is continuing.

Note that the effect using the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" is not limited to the action effect, and may be another effect.
For example, a so-called "chance eye" effect, such as temporary stop display with different numbers such as "3" pattern, "4" pattern, "5" pattern, etc., and then develop into a ready-to-win effect. In the case of installation, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is highlighted (predetermined effect image is added) during the “temporary stop display period”.
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, the effect of highlighting the effect pattern 38 may be executed in the "temporary stop display period".

Further, for example, a combination of odd-numbered patterns such as "3" pattern, "5" pattern, and "7" pattern for the production pattern 38 is continuously fixed and displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and a big hit is made in the fluctuation after the plurality of fluctuations. In the case of installing a look-ahead effect that gives expectation that is given, the effect may be such that the effect pattern 38 is displayed in color (predetermined color image is added) during the 'temporary stop display period'.
That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, an effect such as displaying the effect pattern 38 in color may be executed in the "temporary stop display period".
In the production, when the combination of symbols is continuously fixed and displayed over a plurality of variations, the combination of symbols is not limited to the combination of odd-numbered symbols, and may be the combination of even-numbered symbols, "3" symbol, A combination in which the symbols are arranged in order, such as a "4" symbol and a "5" symbol, may be used.
In addition, an effect that suggests a transition to SP reach or the like may be performed by extinguishing (darkening) the effect pattern 38 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the display mode of the "specific image" for each game state will be described.
45, only the image display device 31 is extracted and described, and in the case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in the "normal game state" (normal), and in the "high probability game state" (high probability) A case in which the variation effect pattern 7 is executed is described.
Note that the animation in FIG. 45 shows only the main part of the time chart.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 7 in normal game state)
(c) T4-T5 (Normal), (c) T5-T6 (Normal), (c) T6-T7 (Normal), (c) T7-T8 (Normal) A display example in the variation production pattern 7 is shown in the figure. Since it is the same as the content described in 43, the description is omitted.

(Display example in variable production pattern 7 in high-probability gaming state)
(c) T4 to T5 (high probability) correspond to the "losing notification" in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
(c) T4 ~ T5 (high probability), compared to (c) T4 ~ T5 (normal), "RUSH during image 31f" indicating that it is in the high probability gaming state, during the high probability gaming state It is different in that a "right shot image 31g" indicating that a right shot is further displayed, and other display modes are the same, but the reserved number image and the small effect symbol 38d change the game state. However, the display mode (design, size, etc.) remains unchanged.

(c) T5 to T6 (high probability) correspond to "background switching" after "SP reach fluctuation period".
At (c) T5 to T6 (high probability), a specific image 31e composed of the same image as (c) T5 to T6 (normal) is displayed. However, the "RUSH in progress image 31f" and the "right shot image 31g" are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the specific image 31e.
In this way, the information (RUSH in-game image 31f, right-hand shot image 31g) that is essential in the game state is displayed, but the specific image 31e itself is the same as in the normal game state.
This eliminates the need to prepare specific images 31e for the normal game state and for the high-probability game state, which leads to a reduction in the CGROM 156 usage area.

(c) T6 to T7 (high probability) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In the high-probability gaming state, even in the "temporary stop display period", the effect symbol 38 remains in the "second display mode", and the same applies in the subsequent "fixed stop display period".
That is, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect symbol 38 is always in the "second display mode".
In addition, a consecutive big win number image 31h (image of "three wins") indicating the number of consecutive big wins (so-called number of consecutive wins) is displayed.
Also, a background image simulating a night is displayed to indicate that the game is in a high probability gaming state.
Note that the other display elements (holding number image, etc.) are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 43, so description thereof will be omitted.

(c) T7 to T8 (high probability) correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
(c) T7 ~ T8 (high probability), compared to (c) T7 ~ T8 (normal), the background image of the night, the image 31f during RUSH indicating that it is in the high probability game state, and the high probability game During the state, the difference is that a right-handed hitting image 31g indicating right-handed hitting, a continuous jackpot number image 31h, and the production pattern 38 of the "second display mode" are displayed, and other display modes are common. is.

In FIG. 45, the normal game state and the high-probability game state have been described as examples, but the common specific image 31e may also be displayed in the time-saving game state.
As a result, the common specific image 31e can be used in the normal game state, the high-probability game state, and the time-saving game state, which leads to a reduction in the use area of the CGROM 156. FIG.
Although the same specific image 31e is displayed in the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state, another specific image 31e (with a different design) may be displayed in the normal game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the display mode of the "specific image" for each mode will be described.
46, only the image display device 31 is extracted and described, and the case where the variation effect pattern 7 is executed in mode A in the "normal game state" (normal) and the "normal game state" (normal) and a case in which the variable effect pattern 7 is executed in mode B in .
Note that the animation in FIG. 46 shows only the main part of the time chart.

The mode is switched for each predetermined number of fluctuations or each time the ready-to-win effect is executed in order to keep the player from getting bored. The mode of the pending icon is different.
For example, in mode A, a background image simulating a mountain is displayed, but in mode B, a background image simulating the sea is displayed.
In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, mode A and mode B are used in the description, but a plurality of modes may be provided.
The mode is synonymous with the so-called "stage (production stage)".
Also, the mode may be switched (shifted to another mode) by the player's operation of the effect button 35 .

(Display example in variation effect pattern 7 of normal game state mode A)
(c) T4 ~ T5 (mode A), (c) T5 ~ T6 (mode A), (c) T6 ~ T7 (mode A), (c) T7 ~ T8 (mode A) table in the variation production pattern 7 The example is the same as the content described in FIG. 43, so the explanation is omitted, but only the point that the "mode A image 31j" indicating mode A is displayed in (c) T6 to T7 (mode A). differ.

(Display example in variation effect pattern 7 of normal game state mode B)
(c) T4 to T5 (mode B) and (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) display examples in the variation effect pattern 7 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 43, so description thereof will be omitted.

(c) T6 to T7 (mode B) correspond to the "temporary stop display period".
In (c) T6 to T7 (mode B), a background image imitating the sea is displayed compared to (c) T6 to T7 (mode A), and the character patterns that make up the production pattern 38 are also based on the concept of the sea. It is designed to be.
Also, a "mode B image 31k" indicating mode B is displayed. Also, the icon displayed in the variable icon display area 31a and the suspended icon displayed in the suspended icon display area 31b are different from those in mode A. It has a design (rhombus).
In addition, the display mode (design, size, etc.) of the reserved number image and the small effect pattern 38d is common to that of the mode A. That is, even if the mode changes, the display mode remains unchanged.

(c) T7 to T8 (mode B) correspond to the "fixed stop display period".
That is, the effect symbol 38 in mode B is displayed as fixed stop (completely stopped).

In this way, the use of the specific image 31e common to all modes leads to a reduction in the area of the CGROM 156 used, while preventing the player from getting bored by using different background images and the like depending on the mode.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the mode A of the normal game state and the mode B of the normal game state have been explained, but even when having a plurality of modes in the time-saving game state and the high probability game state, FIG. can apply.

The specific image 31e common to Mode A and Mode B is displayed, and the specific image 31e common to Mode C and Mode D (specific image 31e different in design from the specific image 31e displayed in Mode A and Mode B) is displayed. 31e) may be displayed.

It should be noted that the game state in which FIGS. 42 to 46 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all game states, or may be applied in some game states.

In FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the effect pattern 38 is changed before and after the specific image 31e is displayed, but it does not have to be changed.
Further, in FIGS. 42 to 46, the display mode of the small effect pattern 38d is not changed before and after the specific image 31e is displayed, but it may be changed.

(Summary of Figures 42 to 46)
42 to 46 have the following features.

i.e.
During display of the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 in FIG. 43),
Small effect symbol 38d→displayed so as to be visible.
After displaying the specific image 31e (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43),
Small effect symbol 38d→displayed so as to be visible.
Effect pattern 38 -> Displayed so as to be visible.
There is such a feature.
As a result, the specific image 31e can clarify the break of the effect, and the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-win effect (SP reach) has ended.
In addition, by making the effect pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-win effect (SP reach) has ended.
In addition, even if the performance symbol 38 is invisible while the specific image 31e is being displayed, at least the small performance symbol 38d is displayed so as to be visible, so that the fluctuation state can be confirmed.
In addition, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, not only the small effect symbol 38d but also the reserved number image is visibly displayed.
In addition, since the effect pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the specific image 31e is displayed and after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is visually recognized during the display of the specific image 31e. By changing the display of the specific image 31e in between, it is possible to switch the display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable.

i.e.
Before the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43),
Display mode of the small effect pattern 38d→No change.
The display mode of the production pattern 38 changes from the second display mode (for example, a display mode composed only of numbers) to the first display mode (for example, a display mode composed of numbers and characters).
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, the effect pattern 38 with a large display size that the player is gazing at changes through the display of the specific image 31e. It is possible to make the player understand clearly.

i.e.
In the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
Effect using the effect pattern 38 (for example, action effect by character pattern) -> Not executed.
In a variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e,
During the temporary suspension display period,
Effect using the effect pattern 38 (for example, action effect by character pattern) -> Execution is possible.
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to give a change to the variable effect pattern 1, which does not involve the display of the specific image 31e and is lacking in change, which leads to an improvement in the interest in the game.
In addition, in the variable effect pattern 7 accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e, although the display of the specific image 31e allowed the player to clearly grasp that the ready-to-win effect (SP reach) has ended, the "temporary stop display It is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win) continues due to the execution of the action effect by the character pattern during the "period".

i.e.
Before (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43) the specific image 31e is displayed,
Display mode of reserved number image→No change (for example, size, design, etc. do not change).
The display mode of the production pattern 38 changes (for example, it changes from the second display mode composed only of numbers to the first display mode composed of numbers and characters).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the specific image 31e can clarify the break of the effect, and the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-win effect (SP reach) has ended.
In addition, by making the effect pattern 38 invisible while the specific image 31e is being displayed, the player can clearly understand that the ready-to-win effect (SP reach) has ended.
In addition, even if the effect pattern 38 is not visible while the specific image 31e is being displayed, at least the reserved number image is displayed so that the change can be confirmed.
Further, while the specific image 31e is being displayed, not only the reserved number image but also the small effect symbol 38d are displayed in a visible manner.
In addition, since the effect pattern 38 changes from the "second display mode" to the "first display mode" before the specific image 31e is displayed and after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is visually recognized during the display of the specific image 31e. By changing the display of the specific image 31e in between, it is possible to switch the display mode without making the player feel uncomfortable.

i.e.
In the normal game state, for example, when the variation effect pattern 7 is executed,
A specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (normal) in FIG. 45) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
It can also be displayed in a specific game state (eg, high-probability game state, time-saving game state) (eg, (c) T5-T6 (high probability) in FIG. 45).
There is such a feature.
As a result, there is no need to prepare the specific image 31e for each game state, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156. FIG.

i.e.
In the first mode, for example, when the variation effect pattern 7 is executed,
A specific image 31e (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (mode A) in FIG. 46) is displayed.
and,
The specific image 31e is
It can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, (c) T5 to T6 (mode B) in FIG. 46).
There is such a feature.
As a result, there is no need to prepare the specific image 31e for each mode, which leads to a reduction in the usage area of the CGROM 156. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the second characteristic portion of the specific image will be explained.
47 to 51 mainly refer to the "sound" during the variable effect, so some descriptions are omitted, but the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 can be combined as appropriate. can be used.

FIG. 47 shows the composition of the music in the variable effect pattern. For example, in the case of the variable effect pattern 1, "music A" is output from the voice output device 32 when the variable effect pattern 1 is executed. , and the number of songs is “one” of “song A”.
Further, in the case of the variable performance pattern 5, after the "music A" is output from the voice output device 32 while the variable performance pattern 5 is being executed, the "music B" is output from the voice output device 32. , and the number of songs is "two", namely, "song A" and "song B".
Since the same concept applies to other variable production patterns, the explanation of other variable production patterns will be omitted, but as a general trend, the more variable production patterns in which the reach production is not executed, the more variable production is being executed. The number of songs (types) output to is small, and the more the variable effect pattern in which the reach effect is executed, the more the number of songs (types) output during the execution of the variable effect, and the more the reach effect is executed. In terms of production patterns as well, the number (types) of songs output during execution of the variable production tends to increase, such as normal reach<SP reach≈SPSP reach.
It should be noted that "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "song E", and "resurrection song" shown in FIG. Alternatively, a piece of music may consist of a melody and lyrics. However, if the first half of the variable performance pattern is composed only of the melody, and the second half of the variable performance pattern is composed of the melody and lyrics, the expectation for the execution of the jackpot game can be improved. Therefore, for example, it is desirable to configure "song A" and "song B" only with a melody, and "song C", "song D", "song E", and "recovery song" with a melody and lyrics. . As a result, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game by the composition of the music.

FIG. 48 is a time chart 2 showing details of each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), (a) showing details of the variable effect pattern 1, and (b) showing details of the variable effect pattern 5. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7, and (d) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 16. FIG.
Also, the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31, the BGM (music) output from the audio output device 32, and the stop sound is shown in detail for each variation effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the variable effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, a “stop sound” is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output. That is, the "stop sound" is a sound that is output during the temporary stop display period.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "song A", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable effect pattern 1 ends (1 The game ends).

(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is the variable effect pattern 5, and the timing (b) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, "song B" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T2.

(Timing (b) T2)
Timing (b) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is not output. That is, when the normal reach is finished, the music associated with the execution of the normal reach is finished.
Also, at this timing, a “stop sound” is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T3.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (b) T4, and when timing (b) T4 is reached, a variable production pattern 5 is finished (1 game is finished).
In addition, although it is assumed that the stop sound is output in the variation effect pattern 5, it may not be output. That is, in the variable effect pattern in which the ready-to-win effect or higher is performed, the "stop sound" may not be output.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is the variable effect pattern 7, and the timing (c) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
At this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, the music accompanying execution of SP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. In other words, by stopping all songs, it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing of ending the "SP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing of ending the "background switching" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "music A", "music B", "music C", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (c) T8, and timing (c) T8 is reached. Then, the variation effect pattern 7 is finished (one game is finished).

As shown in the above fluctuation effect pattern 7, the period of "background switching" from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period" (first period), and after the "SP reach fluctuation period", " During the "background switching" period (second period) leading up to the "temporary stop display period", no music is output.
Note that "the music is not being output" may mean that the music data is not being output, or that the music data is being output but the sound is not being output from the audio output device 32. That is, as long as the music is "non-audible sound" with respect to the player, any state is acceptable.
As a result, in the first period, it is possible to temporarily pause when changing from normal reach music to SP reach music, so that it is possible to clearly recognize that the music has been changed.
In addition, in the second period, silence can be made to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended.
Although the first period and the second period are silent, other periods may be silent.

In addition, as shown in variation effect pattern 7, music (music A, music B, and music C) can be output before the "specific image" is displayed, but after the "specific image" is displayed, the music is output. do not do.
That is, by outputting music before the display of the "specific image" as a reference, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big win. On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to avoid imparting an excessive sense of expectation for the big win. Also, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended.

(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is the variable effect pattern 16, and the timing (d) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
At this timing, "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, "song C" and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T2.

(Timing (d) T2)
Timing (d) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T3.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, the music accompanying execution of SP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, "song D" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T4.

(Timing (d) T4)
Timing (d) T4 is the timing of ending the "SP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T5.

(Timing (d) T5)
Timing (d) T5 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SPSP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song D" is output. In other words, the music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T6.

(Timing (d) T6)
Timing (d) T6 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the big winning lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output. In other words, by stopping all songs, it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T7.

(Timing (d) T7)
Timing (d) T7 is the timing of ending the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T8.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (d) T7 to timing (d) T8 is "2S".

(Timing (d) T8)
Timing (d) T8 is the timing of ending the "background switching" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T9.

(Timing (d) T9)
Timing (d) T9 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", "song C", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "stop sound" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "song B", "song C", "song D", "stop sound", and "specific image" are continued until timing (d) T10, and timing ( d) When T10 is reached, the variable effect pattern 16 ends (one game ends).

That is, in the variable performance pattern 7 and the variable performance pattern 16, unlike the variable performance pattern 1 and the variable performance pattern 5, the "specific image" is displayed, and any music is output from the loss notification to the end of one game. There is no sound.
Moreover, even during the "temporary stop display period", the "stop sound" is not output.
For example, since the frequency of selection of the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 5 is high, it may be executed continuously over a plurality of variations. Therefore, it is necessary to clarify the break between fluctuations by outputting a "stop sound". On the other hand, since the frequency of selection of the variable performance pattern 7 and the variable performance pattern 16 is low, it is rare to continuously execute over a plurality of variations. Therefore, even if the "stop sound" is not output, the discontinuity between the fluctuations becomes clear, so in the fluctuation performance pattern 7 and the fluctuation production pattern 16, the reason is that the "stop sound" is not output.
Further, the variable effect pattern 1 and the variable effect pattern 5 are, for example, a variable effect pattern with little change in the background image during the variable effect, and are not a variable effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed, so the effect is not clear. In particular, since there is a high possibility that it will be executed continuously over a plurality of variations, the discontinuity of the presentation will be even less clear.
Therefore, in such a variable effect pattern, by outputting the "stop sound", it is possible to clarify the discontinuity of the effect.
On the other hand, the variable performance pattern 7 and the variable performance pattern 16 are, for example, variable performance patterns rich in changes such as the background image during the variable performance, so that the change in the background image etc. makes the discontinuity of the performance clear to some extent. Minutes, there is no need to output a "stop sound".
In addition, since it is also a variable production pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, it is possible to play the role of displaying the "specific image"=notifying the break of the production without outputting the "stop sound". In this way, it is possible to perform notification of a suitable effect break according to the variable effect pattern.

Next, using the time chart 3 of FIG. 49, the characteristics of each variable effect pattern when there is no subsequent hold when the variable effect is finished (at the end of one game) will be described.
In FIG. 49, the variation performance pattern 1 and the variation performance pattern 7 will be compared.

It should be noted that "suspension 0" is an example of variable effect pattern 1, (a) T0 to (a) T3, the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage unit", but " The special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (Fig. 12), and (a) T3 ~ is the "0th storage unit", "first storage unit" ~ " It shows that the special figure determination information is not stored in any of the "fourth storage units".
Similarly, if it is an example of the variation effect pattern 7, (c) T0 to (c) T8, the special figure determination information is stored in the "0th storage unit", but the "first storage unit" ~ The special figure determination information is not stored in the "fourth storage unit" (Fig. 12), and (c) T8 ~ is the "0th storage unit", "first storage unit" ~ "fourth storage unit" It shows that the special figure determination information is not stored in either.

Further, the "sound effect" is the SE described above, and is a sound different from the BGM (music).
The "start winning sound" is a sound output when a game ball enters the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15 and changes the color of the pending icon from the time of the ball entry. For example, when the hold icon is displayed with a blue hold icon from the time of entering the ball, the "first start winning sound" is output. It is possible to output a sound according to the color, such as outputting the "start winning sound".
It should be noted that the "start winning sound" is not limited to changing the color of the pending icon from the time of entry, but simply a sound that notifies that the game ball has entered the first start hole 14 or the second start hole 15. (a so-called winning notification sound) may be used.

Further, the "board lighting device" is the board lighting device 34a (FIG. 4), and the "frame lighting device" is the frame lighting device 34b (FIG. 4).
In addition, the “luminescence LV.” of these lighting devices indicates the brightness of each lighting device, and is intended to emit light brighter as the numerical value increases, such as LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. ing. Note that the lightness is, for example, LV1 and LV2, although the number of lit LEDs does not change, the lightness may differ depending on the intensity of light emission, or the lightness may differ by varying the number of lit LEDs. You can let
The brightness of LV5 is the brightness selected when various errors shown in FIG. 71 to be described later occur.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the variable effect pattern 1, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T2)
Timing (a) T2 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (pending 0), the special that was stored in the "0th storage unit" The figure determination information is erased.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "suspended 0", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3, and when timing (a) T3 is reached, the variable production pattern 1 ends (1 The game ends).

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing of ending the "fixed stop display period" and transitioning to the "customer waiting waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A" is still being output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and even in the "0th storage unit" special figure determination information is not remembered.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "song A", "hold 0", and "specific image" are continued for "10S" until timing (a) T4.
That is, when the variable performance is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent hold, and if the variable performance pattern executed immediately before is the variable performance pattern 1, after the "fixed stop display period" is completed Even during the "customer waiting waiting period", the "music A" output during the execution of the variable performance pattern 1 continues to be output.
As a result, even during the "waiting period for waiting for customers", it is possible to impart a feeling that the variable performance is continuing, which leads to an improvement in the amusement of the game.
It should be noted that the fluctuating production pattern in which music continues to be output even during the "customer waiting period" is not limited to the fluctuating production pattern 1. FIG. For example, as long as it is a variable rendering pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed due to the failure shown in FIG. 33, it may be executed.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing when "10 S" have passed since the "customer waiting waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A" is not output. That is, when the "customer waiting period" (customer waiting state) is reached, the music continues to be output for "10 seconds", but the music stops when "10 seconds" have passed.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and even in the "0th storage unit" special figure determination information is not remembered.
Thereafter, as long as the game ball does not enter the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, this aspect continues.

(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is the variable effect pattern 7, and the timing (c) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
At this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T2.

(Timing (c) T2)
Timing (c) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, when displaying a shielding image in "background switching", a shielding sound or the like can be output.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T3.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, the music accompanying execution of SP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, when the title indicating the content of the SP reach is displayed, a sound indicating that the title has been displayed can be output.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T4.

(Timing (c) T4)
Timing (c) T4 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. In other words, by stopping all songs, it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T5.

(Timing (c) T5)
Timing (c) T5 is the timing of ending the "SP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "sound effect" can be output. For example, it is possible to output a sound accompanying the display of the "specific image".
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board lighting device” and the “frame lighting device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV2. That is, the brightness is lowered as the "specific image" is displayed. As a result, when the "specific image" is displayed, the brightness of the entire game machine 1 is lowered, so that the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (c) T5 to timing (c) T6 is "2S".

That is, the "start winning sound" can be output even while the "specific image" is being displayed. It should be noted that while the "specific image" is being displayed, as described with reference to FIG. 43, etc., the holding icon is not displayed. Even when executing a pre-reading effect to change, it is not possible to display the pending icon whose color is changed in real time.
However, since it is possible to output the "starting winning sound" according to the color to be changed, even if the pending icon whose color has changed is not displayed, a skilled player can output the "starting winning sound" can be heard to determine what color the pending icon is.
In addition, if the "starting winning sound" is not output, a case where the holding icon with a sudden change in color is displayed after the "specific image" is displayed may be assumed, giving the player a sense of discomfort, but the "starting winning sound" can be output, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Timing (c) T6)
Timing (c) T6 is the timing of ending the "background switching" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), special figure determination information only in the "0th storage unit" is stored.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “specific image” are continued until timing (c) T7.

(Timing (c) T7)
Timing (c) T7 is the timing of ending the "provisional stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (pending 0), the special that was stored in the "0th storage unit" The figure determination information is erased.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device Illumination LV.” and “Specific Image” are continued until timing (c) T8, and when timing (c) T8 is reached, the variation effect pattern 7 is terminated (one game is terminated). Become.

(Timing (c) T8)
Timing (c) T8 is the timing of ending the "fixed stop display period" and transitioning to the "customer waiting waiting period" (customer waiting state).
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the special figure determination information is not stored in the "first storage unit" to "fourth storage unit" (holding 0), and even in the "0th storage unit" special figure determination information is not remembered.
Also, at this timing, the "start winning sound" can be output.
Also, at this timing, the “board illumination device” and the “frame illumination device” are emitting light with a brightness of LV3.

Then, "song A", "song B", "song C", "hold 0", "sound effect", "start winning sound", "light emission LV of board lighting device", "frame lighting device These modes of "Luminous Light LV." will continue unless a game ball enters the first starting hole 14 or the second starting hole 15 thereafter.

That is, when the variable effect is finished (at the end of one game), if there is no subsequent hold, and if the variable effect pattern executed immediately before is the variable effect pattern 7, after the "fixed stop display period" is finished During the "customer waiting waiting period", the musical piece that was output during the execution of the variable effect pattern 7 is not output.
It should be noted that the variable effect pattern in which music is not output during the "customer waiting period" is not limited to the variable effect pattern 7 as described above. For example, any variation effect pattern in which a "specific image" is displayed in the case of a failure, as shown in FIG. 33, may be applied.
Thus, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed, music is not output during the "customer waiting period", and as described above, in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed, During the "customer waiting period", the music will continue to be output.
The reason for this is also due to the frequency of selection of the variable effect pattern, and the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is not displayed is more frequent than the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed. Therefore, in the fluctuating effect pattern with such a high frequency, even when the "customer waiting waiting period" is reached, the music is continuously output.

Note that FIG. 49 assumes a case where the variation performance pattern 1 is executed in the normal game state and a case where the variation performance pattern 7 is executed in the normal game state.
On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the high-probability game state, the music may be continuously output during the "customer waiting period" even in the variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed when the game is lost. As a result, even during the "customer waiting period", it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous state (time-saving game state, high-probability game state) continues.

Next, with reference to the time chart 4 of FIG. 50, the variation performance pattern at the time of the big win will be explained.
In FIG. 50, a comparison between the variable performance pattern 20 and the variable performance pattern 30 will be described.
It should be noted that there is a variable effect pattern in which the "specific image" is displayed even at the time of the big win, and in the present embodiment, the variable effect pattern 30 corresponds to it.

(Timing (e) T0)
(e) is the variable effect pattern 20, and the timing (e) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
At this timing, "song B" and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "jackpot effect sound" that can be output when notifying the jackpot is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot OP song” that can be output at the opening of the jackpot is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T1. be.

(Timing (e) T1)
Timing (e) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T2. be.

(Timing (e) T2)
Timing (e) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot opening song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T3. be.

(Timing (e) T3)
Timing (e) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song C" is output. That is, the music accompanying execution of SP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T4. be.

(Timing (e) T4)
Timing (e) T4 is the timing of performing "jackpot notification" for notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery was a jackpot in the "SP reach fluctuation period". In addition, on drawing, it describes as "777" for convenience.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
In addition, at this timing, a “jackpot sound effect” is output. That is, a sound effect (for example, queuing queuing) is output to notify the jackpot.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T5. be.

(Timing (e) T5)
Timing (e) T5 is the timing of ending the "SP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot opening song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T6. be.

(Timing (e) T6)
Timing (e) T6 is the timing of ending the "temporary stop display period" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song C" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song C", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are continued until timing (e) T7. be.

(Timing (e) T7)
Timing (e) T7 is the timing of ending the "fixed stop display period" and shifting to the "jackpot OP (opening)".
At this timing, the “jackpot OP song” is output. After that, the "jackpot OP music" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round game is played.
In this way, the "specific image" is basically not displayed in the variation effect pattern at the time of the big win.
That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display of the “specific image”=notification that the result of the big win determination was “losing”.
Exceptionally, however, a specific image is displayed in the following variable effect pattern 30, so the following description will be given.

(Timing (f) T0)
(f) is the variable effect pattern 30, and the timing (f) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. When the variable display is started, "song A" is output from the audio output device 32 .
At this timing, "song B" and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, after the loss notification is once performed, the “recovery time music” that can be output during the execution of the resurrection effect in which the big win notification is performed in reverse is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T1.

(Timing (f) T1)
Timing (f) T1 is the timing of ending the "normal fluctuation period" and transitioning to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A" is not output.
Also, at this timing, "song B" is output. In other words, the music is changed to the one that accompanies the execution of normal reach.
Also, at this timing, "song D" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T2.

(Timing (f) T2)
Timing (f) T2 is the timing of ending the "normal reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output. That is, while "background switching" is being performed, no music is output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T3.

(Timing (f) T3)
Timing (f) T3 is the timing of ending the “background switching” and transitioning to the “SPSP reach fluctuation period”.
At this timing, "song A" and "song B" are not output.
Also, at this timing, "song D" is output. In other words, the music accompanying the execution of SPSP reach is output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T4.

(Timing (f) T4)
Timing (f) T4 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SPSP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output. In other words, by stopping all songs, it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T5.

(Timing (f) T5)
Timing (f) T5 is the timing of ending the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" and transitioning to "background switching" for switching from the "SPSP reach fluctuation period" to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed so as to be visible.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T6.
The display time of the "specific image" from timing (f) T5 to timing (f) T6 is "2S".

(Timing (f) T6)
Timing (f) T6 is the timing of ending the "background switching" and transitioning to the "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T7.

(Timing (f) T7)
Timing (f) T7 is the timing of ending the "temporary stop display period" and transitioning to the "resurrection effect".
That is, if it is a loss, the "temporary stop display period" ends and shifts to the "fixed stop display period", but if it is a big hit, it shifts to the "resurrection effect" at that timing.
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is output. That is, along with the execution of the resurrection effect, the "music for resurrection" is output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T8.

(Timing (f) T8)
Timing (f) T8 is the timing for performing the "big win notification" during the "resurrection effect".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "recovery music" is output.
In addition, at this timing, a “jackpot sound effect” is output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T9.

(Timing (f) T9)
Timing (f) T9 is the timing of ending the "resurrection effect" and transitioning to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, "song A", "song B", and "song D" are not output.
Also, at this timing, the "music for resurrection" is not output.
Also, at this timing, the “jackpot sound effect” is not output.
Also, at the timing, the “jackpot OP song” is not output.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of "song A", "song B", "song D", "resurrection song", "jackpot sound effect", "jackpot OP song", and "specific image" are performed at timing (f) It continues until T10.

(Timing (f) T10)
Timing (f) T10 is the timing of ending the "fixed stop display period" and transitioning to the "jackpot OP (opening)".
At this timing, the “jackpot OP song” is output. After that, the "jackpot OP music" is output until the jackpot OP ends and the first round game is played.
As described above, the specific image is exceptionally displayed in the variation effect pattern 30 at the time of the big win accompanied by the resurrection effect.
However, even from the distribution ratio in FIG. 33, it is rare that the variable production pattern 30 is selected at the time of the big win, so when comparing the time of loss and the time of big win, it is overwhelmingly the case of loss. is related to the fact that the "specific image" is likely to appear.

In this way, the number of songs output in one variable effect is larger in the variable jackpot pattern 30 with the display of the specific image than in the variable jackpot pattern 20 without the display of the specific image. It is in. As a result, the game interest can be improved.
It should be noted that since the variable effect pattern 20 is only mentioned as an example, the variable effect pattern 20 can be replaced with another variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of another specific image.
In that case, according to FIG. 47, the number of songs for the variable effect pattern 29 is "4", and according to FIG. 47, the number of songs for the variable effect pattern 30 is "4". Although the numbers are the same, since the number of songs is "3" in the other variable performance patterns, the display of the specific image is higher than that of the variable performance pattern without the display of the specific image in most of the variable performance patterns for the jackpot. The number of songs is larger in the variable production pattern with .

Next, with reference to time chart 5 in FIG. 51, a comparison will be made between the variation performance pattern for a loss without displaying a specific image and the variation performance pattern for a big win without displaying a specific image.
In FIG. 51, the variable performance pattern 1 and the variable performance pattern 5 are mentioned as the variable performance pattern at the time of losing, and the variable performance pattern 20 is mentioned as the variable performance pattern at the time of the big hit. Since the pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 48, and the variation effect pattern at the time of the big win has already been described with reference to FIG. 50, detailed description of the time chart will be omitted.

That is, the number of pieces of music is "1" or "2" in the variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of a specific image, and the number of songs is "1" or "2" (see FIG. 47). The number of songs is "3" or "4".
Therefore, the number of songs output in one variable effect is larger in the variable effect pattern that is a big win and does not involve the display of a specific image than in the variable effect pattern that is not accompanied by the display of a specific image. be.
In other words, if the specific image is not displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win may change depending on the number of songs, so the game interest in the variable performance of 1 is improved depending on the presence or absence of the display of the specific image and the number of songs. can do.

It should be noted that the game state in which FIGS. 47 to 51 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all game states, or may be applied in some game states.

(Summary of Figures 47 to 51)
47 to 51 have the following features.

i.e.
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, deny the step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process),
Variation production patterns (for example, variation production pattern 7 to variation production pattern 18) accompanying the display of the specific image 31e are
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, deny the step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process),
Compared to the variable effect patterns (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 6) that do not involve the display of the specific image 31e,
It is easy to execute a reach effect consisting of a plurality of songs (for example, the variable effect pattern 1 is a variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 1. On the other hand, the variable effect pattern 7 is It is a variable effect pattern with the display of the specific image 31e, and the number of songs is 3 (the number of songs of the ready-to-win effect is 2)).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

i.e.
First reach effect (for example, variable effect pattern 7) → number of songs 3 (the number of songs of reach effect is 2),
Second ready-to-win effect (for example, variable effect pattern 16) → number of songs is 4 (the number of songs in ready-to-win effect is 3), so the number of songs is different.
And (even if the number of songs is different)
When the specific image 31e is displayed after executing the first ready-to-win effect (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48),
There is a case where the specific image 31e is displayed after executing the second ready-to-win effect (for example, (d) T7 to (d) T8 in FIG. 48).
There is such a feature.
As a result, since the number of songs differs for each variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is performed, the amusement of the game can be improved. Since 31e is displayed, the timing at which the ready-to-win effect is finished can be clearly recognized.

i.e.
In the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance accompanied by music (for example, variable performance pattern 7 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30).
At least a partial period of the specific effect (for example, (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, ie, “background switching”)→a period without music.
In the specific effect, the period during which the specific image 31e is displayed (for example, (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, ie, "background switching") →the period without music.
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, in the period from (c) T2 to (c) T3 in FIG. 48, when changing from the normal reach music to the SP reach music, there can be a pause, so that the music can be changed without discomfort. It can be carried out.
In addition, for example, during the period from (c) T5 to (c) T6 in FIG. 48, the player can clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended by turning off the sound.

That is, in the variable production,
Before the specific image 31e is displayed→accompanied by music (for example, in the case of variation effect pattern 7, music A, music B, and music C are output).
After the specific image 31e is displayed→not accompanied by music (for example, no music is output).
There is such a feature.
As a result, with the display of the "specific image" as a reference, by outputting the music before the display, the expectation for the big win can be improved. On the other hand, by not outputting the music after the display, it is possible to avoid imparting an excessive sense of expectation for the big win.

i.e.
In the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 7) accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in "provisional stop display period"-> not output (eg, (c) T6 to (c) T7 in Fig. 48).
In the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) that does not involve the display of the specific image 31e,
"Stop sound" in "temporary stop display period"→output (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T2 in FIG. 48).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to output a suitable "stop sound" according to the frequency of selection and the contents of the presentation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57, the third characteristic portion of the specific image will be explained.
52 to 57 mainly refer to the announcement effects, so some descriptions are omitted, but the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 and the contents described in FIGS. The contents can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 52 is a time chart 6 showing details for each variable effect pattern (see FIG. 33), (a) shows details of the variable effect pattern 10, and mainly shows details of the pseudo run. (b) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 5, and mainly shows the details of the advance notice of the dialogue. (c) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 7, and mainly shows the details of the roulette announcement effect. (d) shows the details of the variable effect pattern 33, and mainly shows the details of the SU notice effect.
Further, details of the relationship between the "specific image" displayed on the image display device 31 and the advance notice effect are shown for each variation effect pattern.

(Timing (a) T0)
(a) is the variable effect pattern 10, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T1.

(Timing (a) T1)
Timing (a) T1 is the timing of transition from the "normal fluctuation period" to the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period".
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a character image "Continue!" (corresponding to the speech announcement effect) that suggests that the pseudo-continuation will continue.
Furthermore, after that, the "NEXT pattern" suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T2.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo-continuation 2 notification period", the "dialogue announcement effect", which is one aspect of the announcement effect, can be executed redundantly.
It should be noted that not only the "dialogue notice effect" but other notice effects not shown can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T3 via timing (a) T2.

(Timing (a) T3)
Timing (a) T3 is the timing of shifting from the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period" to the "continuous effect".
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-run has continued.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T4.

(Timing (a) T4)
Timing (a) T4 is the timing of shifting from the "continuous effect" to the "pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation period".
At this timing, the “pseudo-run 2-variation image” is displayed on the “image display device”.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T5.

(Timing (a) T5)
Timing (a) T5 is the timing of transition from the "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period" to the "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period".
At this timing, the character image "Continue!?" is displayed on the "image display device" to suggest that the pseudo-run will continue.
Furthermore, after that, the "NEXT pattern" suggesting the execution of the pseudo-run is displayed on the "image display device" until timing (a) T6.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed. That is, in the "pseudo-continue 3 notification period", the "dialogue announcement effect", which is one aspect of the announcement effect, can be redundantly executed.
It should be noted that not only the "dialogue notice effect" but other notice effects not shown can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T7 through timing (a) T6.

(Timing (a) T7)
Timing (a) T7 is the timing of shifting from the "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period" to the "continuous effect".
At this timing, the "image display device" displays a "continuation effect image" indicating that the pseudo-run has continued.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T8.

(Timing (a) T8)
Timing (a) T8 is the timing of transition from the "continuous effect" to the "pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "pseudo-run 3-variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T9.

(Timing (a) T9)
Timing (a) T9 is the timing of transition from the "pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These aspects of the "image display device", the "dialogue notice effect", and the "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T10.

(Timing (a) T10)
Timing (a) T10 is the timing of shifting from the "normal reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "switching image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

Then, these modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T11.

(Timing (a) T11)
Timing (a) T11 is the timing of shifting from "background switching" to "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "SP reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T12.

(Timing (a) T12)
Timing (a) T12 is the timing of performing the "losing notification" for informing that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss in the "SP reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, a "failure notification image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T13.

(Timing (a) T13)
Timing (a) T13 is the timing of shifting from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching".
At this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for 2S.
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed. That is, during the "background switching" from the timing (a) T13 to the timing (a) T14, the "dialogue announcement effect", which is one mode of the announcement effect, cannot be performed redundantly. It should be noted that not only the "diaphragm announcement effect" but other announcement effects not shown are also unexecutable.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T14.

(Timing (a) T14)
Timing (a) T14 is the timing of transition from "background switching" to "temporary stop display period".
At this timing, the "temporary stop image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T15.

(Timing (a) T15)
Timing (a) T15 is the timing of transition from the "provisional stop display period" to the "fixed stop display period".
At this timing, the "fixed still image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
Also, at this timing, the "specific image" is not displayed.

These modes of "image display device", "dialogue notice effect", and "specific image" are continued until timing (a) T16, and when timing (a) T16 is reached, the variable effect pattern 10 ends. (1 game ends).

It should be noted that the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period" constitutes a "suggestive production" according to the result of the big hit determination.
Furthermore, the display of the "specific image" constitutes a "suggestive notification effect" that makes the execution of the suggestive effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "temporary stop display period") expected.
It should be noted that, referring to FIG. 33, the display of the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed at the time of losing than at the time of the big win. Therefore, it can be said that the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" after the display of the "specific image" is a specific suggestive production suggesting that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is low. In addition, the display of the "specific image" can be said to be a specific suggestive notification effect that suggests that the possibility of the jackpot game being executed is low.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of (a) the variable effect pattern 10 of FIG. 52, a supplementary description of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 10 will be given using the animation of FIG.
FIG. 54 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described in FIG.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 10)
(a) T0 to T1 correspond to the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction.
After that, the left effect pattern 38a and the right effect pattern 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and only the middle effect pattern 38b is vertically scroll-displayed.

(a) T1 to T2 correspond to the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" (the above-described pseudo-continuous execution suggestive symbol) appears from the upper part of the screen as the middle effect symbol 38b.
Further, a character image 31l is displayed, and a character image (corresponding to the speech announcement effect) indicating that the pseudo-continuation will be continued is emitted from the character image 31l.

(a) T2 to T3 correspond to the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" appearing from the top of the screen is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (it may be fixed and stopped).

(a) T3 to T4 correspond to "continuous effect".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT symbol 31m" in the center of the screen, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed in the upper right of the display area. is displayed with the display content of "x2".
Also, at this time, the sound output device 32 outputs a sound effect "Jackin!" as a simulated continuation effect.

(a) T4 to T5 correspond to the "pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation period".
That is, (a) simply by adding the “pseudo consecutive number image 31n” of “×2” to the display contents indicated by T0 to T1, it looks as if a new variable effect has started.

(a) T6 to T7 correspond to the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "NEXT symbol 31m" appearing from the top of the screen is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

(a) T7 to T8 correspond to "continuous effect".
That is, the left effect symbol 38a and the right effect symbol 38c are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect image is displayed around the temporary stop display "NEXT symbol 31m" in the center of the screen, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed in the upper right of the display area. is displayed with the display content of "x3".
Also, at this time, the sound output device 32 outputs a sound effect "Jackin!" as a simulated continuation effect.

In the variable effect pattern 10 with the pseudo-run, the display mode is as described above.
The ``pseudo-continuous 2nd fluctuation period'' and the ``pseudo-continuous 3rd fluctuation period'' constitute the ``suggestive effect'' according to the result of the big win determination.
Furthermore, the ``pseudo-continuous notification period'' of the ``pseudo-continuous 2 notification period'' and the ``pseudo-continuous notification period of 3'' can period”) to be executed.

Although the time chart does not particularly describe the time relationship, the time from the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period" to the "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period" (in other words, from the "first suggestive notification effect" to " The time until the first suggestive effect”) is the time from the display of the “specific image” to the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the “temporary stop display period” (in other words, from the “second suggestive notification effect” It is composed of a long time compared to the time until "the second suggestive effect").
Also, the effect execution time of the "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period" and the "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period" is the effect execution time of the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period". (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “relationship of performance execution time”).
As a result, for example, in the ``first suggestion notification effect'' to the ``first suggestion effect'' performed before the timing of informing the result of the big win determination, the expectation for the big win can be maintained for a long time. .
On the other hand, for example, in the ``second suggestion notification effect'' to the ``second suggestion effect'' performed after the timing of informing the result of the big hit determination, the suggestion that the suggestion report effect is expected to be executed promptly. By executing the performance, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in expectations for the big win.
In addition, the relationship of the said time is not restricted to this, Both may be equal time, and both may be reversed.

Let us return to the description of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (b) T0)
(b) is the variable effect pattern 5, and the timing (b) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" can be executed.

Then, these modes of "image display device" and "dialogue announcement effect" are continued until timing (b) T1.

(Timing (b) T1)
Timing (b) T1 is the timing at which the speech announcement effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" and the image "ready-to-win!" for notifying the execution of the ready-to-win effect in advance are displayed on the "image display device".
These aspects of the "image display device" and the "dialogue notice effect" continue until timing (b) T2, and after that, at timing (b) T3, the "normal fluctuation period" ends.

(Timing (b) T3)
Timing (b) T3 is the timing from the end of the "normal fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
At this timing, the "normal reach image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the "line announcement effect" is not executed.
In addition, the description of the contents after the variation effect pattern 5 is omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of variable effect pattern 5 in FIG. 52(b), a supplementary description of the display mode of part of variable effect pattern 5 will be given using the animation of FIG.
FIG. 55 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described in FIG.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 5)
(b) T0 to T1 correspond to before execution of the dialogue announcement effect in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction.
After that, in (b) T1 to T2, the character image 31l is displayed, and from the character image 31l, a dialogue image of "Reach!" is displayed (issued) to notify the execution of the ready-to-win effect in advance.

Then, in (b) T2 to T3, the left production pattern 38a (5 patterns) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and further, in (b) T3 and later, the right production pattern 38c (5 patterns) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the 5 patterns are displayed. A normal reach effect is executed.

In the variable production pattern 5, the display mode is as described above.
It should be noted that the "normal reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, in the "dialogue notice effect", the dialogue image that pre-announces the execution of the reach effect ("It's a reach!" Suggestion notification effect” is configured.
It should be noted that even when the "dialogue announcement effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" is not sufficient for the above-mentioned "effect execution time relationship” applies.

Let us return to the description of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (c) T0)
(c) is the variable effect pattern 7, and the timing (c) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the “roulette announcement effect” can be executed.

These aspects of the "image display device" and the "roulette notice effect" are continued until timing (c) T1.

(Timing (c) T1)
Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the roulette announcement effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, a "roulette effect image" (a roulette effect image displaying a plurality of options) is displayed on the "image display device". Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an effect of selecting one of the multiple options is executed.
These aspects of the “image display device” and the “roulette advance notice effect” continue until timing (c) T2, and after that, at timing (c) T3, the “normal fluctuation period” ends.

(Timing (c) T3)
Timing (c) T3 is the timing from the end of the "normal fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
After that, at timing (c) T4, the transition to "background switching" is made, at timing (c) T5, the transition is made to "SP reach fluctuation period", and the corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device". be done.
It should be noted that the description of the contents after the variation effect pattern 7 is omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of (c) variable effect pattern 7 in FIG. 52, a supplementary description of the display mode of part of the variable effect pattern 7 will be given using the animation in FIG.
FIG. 56 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the contents described in FIG.

(Display example in variation effect pattern 7)
(c) T0 to T1 correspond to before the execution of the roulette notice effect in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction.
After that, at (c) T1 to T2, a roulette effect image 31o is displayed, corresponding to the roulette pattern 1 (see FIG. 37) of "x", "?", "SP", "heat", and "rainbow". options are displayed.
Then, an effect of selecting one of the options (an effect of rotating the selection cursor image) is performed, and the effect is continued for a predetermined time.
Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the screen becomes dark except for the option 1 to notify that the option 1 has been selected.
It should be noted that FIG. 56 assumes that "SP" has been selected.

(c) T3 to T4 indicate "normal reach fluctuation period", and (c) T4 to T5 indicate "background switching", in which a switching image (an image "development!") is displayed.
In (c) T4 to T5, the background image simulating a mountain corresponding to the "normal reach fluctuation period" is not displayed, and in addition to the character image "development!", a white-out image is displayed. there is
And (c) T5~ indicates the “SP reach fluctuation period”. During the "SP Reach Fluctuation Period", the mountain-like background image corresponding to the "Normal Reach Fluctuation Period" is not displayed. be done.

In the variable effect pattern 7, the display mode is as described above.
It should be noted that the "SP reach fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive effect" according to the result of the big hit determination.
Furthermore, selection of an option (selection of "SP" in the example of FIG. 56) in the "roulette notice effect" is a "suggestion "Notification production" is configured.
Note that even when the "roulette notice effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" may be affected by the above-described "effect execution time relationship” applies.

Let us return to the description of the time chart in FIG. 52 again.
(Timing (d) T0)
(d) is the variable effect pattern 33, and the timing (d) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started.
At this timing, the "normal variation image" is displayed on the "image display device".
Also, at this timing, the “SU advance notice effect” can be executed.

These modes of "image display device" and "SU preview effect" are continued until timing (d) T1.

(Timing (d) T1)
Timing (d) T1 is the timing at which the SU announcement effect is executed during the variable display.
At this timing, the "SU preview effect image" is displayed on the "image display device". In FIG. 52, it is assumed that "Accurate SU5" is finally displayed. Therefore, the display is switched for a predetermined period of time in order such as "SU1"→"SU2"→"SU3"→"SU4"→"SU5"→"probable SU5".
These aspects of the “image display device” and “SU advance notice effect” continue until timing (d) T2, and after that, at timing (d) T3, the “normal fluctuation period” ends.

(Timing (d) T3)
Timing (d) T3 is the timing from the end of the "normal fluctuation period" to the "normal reach fluctuation period".
After that, at timing (d) T4, the transition is made to the "full rotation fluctuation period", at timing (c) T5, the transition is made to the "temporary stop display period", and at timing (c) T6, the transition is made to the "fixed stop display period". Then, the corresponding images are displayed on the "image display device".
A detailed description of the variable effect pattern 33 will be omitted.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the time chart of (d) the variable effect pattern 33 of FIG. 52, a supplementary description of the display mode of a part of the variable effect pattern 33 will be given using the animation of FIG.
FIG. 57 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described in FIG.

(Display example in variable effect pattern 33)
(d) T0 to T1 correspond to before the SU announcement effect is executed in the "normal fluctuation period".
That is, the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction.
After that, a step-up notice effect image 31p is displayed from (d) T1 to T2, and a step-up notice effect image 31p of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" is displayed from (d) to T2.
Furthermore, in conjunction with the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p saying "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation", the voice output device 32 outputs a notification sound (cuin! cuin!) to inform that the change is a big win.

(d) T4 to T5 indicate the "total rotation fluctuation period". In the "full rotation fluctuation period", the left effect pattern 38a, the middle effect pattern 38b, and the right effect pattern 38c are aligned in the same pattern, and are displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction.
Then, at (d) T5-T6, the left production pattern 38a (7 patterns), the middle production pattern 38b (7 patterns), and the right production pattern 38c (7 patterns) are temporarily stopped and displayed, and (d) at T6-T7, The left production pattern 38a (7 patterns), the middle production pattern 38b (7 patterns), and the right production pattern 38c (7 patterns) are determined and displayed.

The variable effect pattern 33 has the display mode as described above.
It should be noted that the "total rotation fluctuation period" constitutes a "suggestive effect" according to the result of the jackpot determination.
Furthermore, the display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (in the example of FIG. 56, the display of "accurate SU5 full rotation") is executed by the suggestive effect ("full rotation fluctuation period"). Construct a “suggestion notification effect” that makes you anticipate that it will be done.
Note that even when the "SU notice effect" is executed in the variable effect pattern 10, the relationship between the display of the "specific image" and the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period" may be affected by the above-described "effect execution time relationship” applies.

Above, (a) variable effect pattern 10, (b) variable effect pattern 5, (c) variable effect pattern 7, and (d) variable effect pattern 33 have been described as examples. According to them, before the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination Information”) is characterized in that the number of executable suggestive effects is larger than that after the latter.
In addition, before the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination (eg, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)), the timing of informing the result of the big hit determination (eg, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)) It is characterized in that the number of executable suggestive notification effects is larger than that of later versions.
That is, before the timing of announcing the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
Production (pseudo-continuation 2 Directing, pseudo-continuous 3 directing),
In the "serif notice effect", a dialogue image (a dialogue image "It's a reach!") (suggestion notification effect) that notifies the execution of the reach effect in advance, and a combination of the "normal reach fluctuation period" (suggestion effect) (serif Notice production and normal reach production),
In the "roulette notice effect", an effect (roulette notice Production and roulette compatible production),
Display of the step-up notice effect image 31p in the "SU notice effect" (in the example of FIG. 56, display of "accurate SU5 full rotation") (suggestion notification effect) and "full rotation fluctuation period" (suggestion effect) Production by combining with (SU notice production and SU compatible production),
is feasible, while
After the timing of announcing the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "loss notification" in FIG. 52(a)),
Effect (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect) by combining the display of the "specific image" (suggestive notification effect) and the temporary stop display (suggestive effect) of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period",
is feasible.
As a result, before the timing of informing the result of the big win determination, the sense of expectation for the big win can be improved by a plurality of types of suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects.
Further, after the timing of announcing the result of the big win determination, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in expectations for the big win.

In this way, before the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination, compared with the timing after the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination, since the number of executable suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects is large, the result of the big win determination is Prior to the notification timing, depending on the degree of execution of the notice effect, an effect (for example, a pseudo-continuation 2 effect, a pseudo-continuation 3 effect) combining the first suggestive notification effect and the first suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous 2 effect) and a second It is possible to execute a combination of the suggestive notification effect and the second suggestive effect (for example, a speech advance notice effect and a normal reach effect), and after the timing of informing the result of the big hit determination, the third suggestive report effect is performed. (display of the specific image 31e) and the third suggestion effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the “temporary stop display period”) can be executed (background switching effect and temporary stop display effect). I can say.

It should be noted that, without being limited to such a form, before and after the timing of informing the result of the big hit determination, the number of executable suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects may be the same, or the timing of informing the result of the big win determination. The number of executable suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects may be larger in the latter than in the former.

Further, as shown in the example of variable effect pattern 10 in FIG. 52(a), for example, in the "pseudo-continuation 2 notification period", during its execution, other notice effects (for example, "line notice effect") are simultaneously displayed. It can be executed, but, for example, when the "specific image" is being displayed, other forewarning effects (for example, "words forewarning effect") cannot be executed at the same time.
That is, when executing the first suggestive notification effect (“pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”), the advance notice effect can be executed, and when executing the second suggestive notification effect (display of the “specific image”) , it can be said that the advance notice effect is not executed.
As a result, in a situation where the expectation for the big win is to be improved, the expectation for the big win can be further improved by simultaneously executing another announcement effect.
In addition, in the phase of preventing an excessive increase in expectations for a big win, by not simultaneously executing other notice effects, it is possible to maintain the prevention of an excessive increase in expectations for a big win.

FIG. 53 is a diagram extracting a part of the variable effect pattern of FIG. It shows the relationship of the appearance degree of the specific image between the time and the time of the big win.
Note that, in FIG. 53, the variation performance pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is set to 1 is, for example, normal variation→pseudo consecutive success→normal variation, so that it looks as if the variation is performed twice. , "pseudo-continuous 2 effect". In addition, the variation performance pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is set to 2 is, for example, normal fluctuation → pseudo consecutive success → normal fluctuation → pseudo consecutive success → normal reach fluctuation, and it looks as if three fluctuations are performed. Therefore, it becomes a “pseudo-continuous 3-effect”. In addition, the variable effect pattern in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is set to 3 is, for example, normal fluctuation → pseudo consecutive success → normal fluctuation → pseudo consecutive success → normal fluctuation → pseudo consecutive success → normal reach fluctuation. Since four variations are performed, it becomes a "quasi-continuous 4 effect".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, also in the variable effect pattern for the big win, similarly, "pseudo-run 2 effect", "pseudo-run 3 effect", and "pseudo-run 4 effect" can be executed.
Note that the executable pseudo-continuous effect is not limited to this, and may further include a "pseudo-continuous 5 effect" or a "pseudo-continuous 6 effect".

(a) shows the relationship between the number of pseudo-runs and the degree of appearance of a specific image for each variable effect pattern (at the time of loss), and shows an excerpt of the variable effect patterns in which the pseudo-run is executed when the game is lost. Of these, only the variable effect pattern 3 is the variable effect pattern that does not involve the display of the "specific image", and the other variable effect patterns are the variable effect patterns that involve the display of the "specific image".
For example, when the variable performance pattern 3 is compared with the other variable performance patterns, the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed in the variable performance pattern in which the number of simulated repetitions is larger. This is because the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the easier it is to move to SP reach or higher, so the "specific image" is more likely to be displayed in the situation. This is because it is necessary to clearly notify that the ready-to-win effect has ended with a failure after the failure notification is made, so that the "specific image" is likely to be displayed.

It should be noted that when the pseudo-continuous advance notice is given, the specific image 31e may be displayed regardless of the number of times, and the specific image 31e is displayed in the variable effect pattern in which the number of pseudo-continuous times is defined to be large. You can make it difficult.

(b) shows the relationship between the degree of appearance of the specific image at the time of losing and at the time of the big win, and is an excerpt of the variation effect pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image". As described above, the variable effect pattern 30 is the only variable effect pattern that involves the display of the "specific image" at the time of the big win, and the variable effect pattern 30 fluctuates at the time of the big win even from the distribution ratio of FIG. Since the production pattern 30 is rarely selected, there is a tendency that the variable production pattern accompanied by the display of the "specific image" is more likely to appear at the time of the loss than at the time of the big win.
As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the display of the "specific image"=the result of the judgment of the jackpot was a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes the player recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended with a loss. can be made easier.

It should be noted that the variable effect pattern accompanying the display of the "specific image" may appear more easily at the time of the big win than at the time of the loss.

It should be noted that the game state in which FIGS. 52 to 57 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all game states, or may be applied in some game states.

(Summary of Figures 52 to 57)
52 to 57 have the following features.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period” or “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, dialogue image “Reach!” selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Before and after a predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for announcing the result of the big hit determination, the numbers of suggestive notification effects and suggestive effects that can be executed are different.
There is such a feature.
As a result, the expectation for the big win can be improved by the suggestive notification effect and the suggestive effect before the timing of informing the result of the big win determination.
Further, after the timing of announcing the result of the big win determination, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the sense of anticipation for the big win.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period” or “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, dialogue image “Reach!” selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Before a predetermined timing (for example, T12 in (a) of FIG. 52) for announcing the result of the big hit determination→First production (for example, pseudo-continuous 2 production, It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous 3 effect) and a second effect (for example, a dialogue announcement effect and a normal reach effect) by combining the second suggestive notification effect and the second suggestive effect.
After a predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for notifying the result of the big hit determination → Third suggestive notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and third suggestive effect (for example, “temporary stop A third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed in combination with the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "display period".
There is such a feature.
As a result, the expectation for the big win can be improved by the suggestive notification effect and the suggestive effect before the timing of informing the result of the big win determination.
Further, after the timing of announcing the result of the big win determination, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the sense of anticipation for the big win.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that anticipate that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period", "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period", dialogue image "Reach!" selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → First suggestion notification effect (for example, “pseudo consecutive 2 notification period”) and first suggestion effect (for example, “ Pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period") may be executed.
After a predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for notifying the result of the big hit determination → second suggestive notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestive effect (for example, “temporary stop Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "display period") may be executed.
When executing the first suggestive notification effect (for example, “pseudo-consecutive 2 notification period”) → notice effect (for example, dialogue notice effect) can be executed.
When the second suggestive notification effect (for example, display of the specific image 31e) is executed→the notice effect (for example, dialogue notice effect) is not executed.
There is such a feature.
As a result, in a situation where the expectation for the big win is to be improved, the expectation for the big win can be further improved by simultaneously executing another announcement effect.
In addition, in the phase of preventing the excessive improvement of the feeling of expectation for the big win, it is possible to maintain the prevention of the excessive improvement of the feeling of expectation for the big win by not executing other notice effects at the same time.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that anticipate that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period", "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period", dialogue image "Reach!" selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Predetermined timing (e.g., (a) T12 in FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → First suggestion notification effect (e.g., “pseudo continuous 2 notification period”) and first suggestion effect (e.g., “ A first effect (for example, pseudo-run 2 execution period”) in combination with a second suggestive notification effect (for example, “pseudo-run 3 notification period”) and a second suggestive effect (for example, A second effect (for example, a pseudo-run 3 effect) in combination with a “pseudo-run 3 execution period”) can be executed.
After a predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for notifying the result of the big hit determination → third suggestive notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and third suggestive effect (for example, “temporary stop A third effect (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed in combination with the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during the "display period".
The ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect is different from the ratio of executing the first effect, the second effect and the third effect (for example, in FIG. 53, the variable effect patterns 3, 9, 14, In the case of 15 pseudo-run times (pseudo-run 2 effect), like the variable effect pattern 3, the pseudo-run is executed but the specific image 31e may not be displayed. 2 (pseudo-run 3 effects), the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable effect patterns, so only the first effect is executed when the first effect and the second effect are executed. The ratio of execution of the third effect is high compared to the case where the third effect is executed).
There is such a feature.
As a result, even if the effect content becomes complicated due to the execution of the SP ready-to-win, etc., it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect ended with a failure.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that anticipate that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period", "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period", dialogue image "Reach!" selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination→First suggested notification effect (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”) and the It is possible to execute a first effect (for example, pseudo-run 2 effect, pseudo-run 3 effect) in combination with one suggestive effect (eg, “pseudo-run 2 execution period”, “pseudo-run 3 execution period”).
After a predetermined timing (e.g., (a) T12 in FIG. 52) to notify the result of the big hit determination → second suggestive notification effect (e.g., display of specific image 31e) and second suggestive effect (e.g., background switching effect) and temporary stop display effect) can be executed.
The ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the big win determination is a loss and the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect when the result of the big win determination is a big win are different (for example, In FIG. 53, fluctuation production patterns 7 to 18 are fluctuation production patterns in which the specific image 31e is displayed in the case of a loss, and fluctuation production pattern 30 is a fluctuation production pattern in which the specific image 31e is displayed in the case of a big win. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a big win).
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the display of the "specific image"=the result of the big hit determination is a loss, and the display of the "specific image" makes the player recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended with a loss. can be made easier.

i.e.
In the variable performance,
Suggestion production according to the result of the jackpot determination (for example, "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary Temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "stop display period"),
Suggestive notification effects that anticipate that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 notification period", "pseudo-continuous 3 notification period", dialogue image "Reach!" selection of options in "Notice Effect" (for example, selection of "SP" in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in "SU Notice Effect" (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 Full Rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e").
Predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) to notify the result of the jackpot determination → First suggestion notification effect (for example, “pseudo consecutive 2 notification period”) and first suggestion effect (for example, “ Pseudo-run 2 fluctuation period”) (for example, pseudo-run 2 effect) can be executed.
After a predetermined timing (for example, (a) T12 in FIG. 52) for notifying the result of the big hit determination → second suggestive notification effect (for example, display of specific image 31e) and second suggestive effect (for example, “temporary stop Temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in "display period" (for example, background switching effect and temporary stop display effect) can be executed.
And the execution time of the above effects is different.
There is such a feature.
Thus, for example, in the ``first suggestion notification performance'' to the ``first suggestion performance'' performed before the timing of informing the result of the big win determination, the expectation for the big win can be maintained.
On the other hand, for example, in the ``second suggestive notification effect'' to the ``second suggestive effect'' performed after the timing of informing the result of the big win determination, it is possible to prevent the excessive expectation for the big win from being improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, the fourth characteristic portion of the specific image will be explained.
58 to 61 mainly refer to the design fan effect, so some descriptions are omitted, but the contents described in FIGS. 42 to 46 and 47 to 51 The contents described above and the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57 can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 58(a) is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbols 38 (at the time of normal reach loss), and this table is stored in the sub ROM 120b, for example. For example, the sub CPU 120a, based on the received effect design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the stop special figure data indicated by the effect design designation command is "00", and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is " If it is fluctuation pattern 4", referring to the table shown in FIG. 58(a) at the time of normal reach loss, it is determined which production pattern 38 is used to perform the reach effect and make it a loss.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), "1 symbol" has a distribution ratio of "10%", "2 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "20%", and "3 symbols". 'symbol' has a distribution ratio of '5%', '4 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '15%', and '5 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '10%'. ``6 symbols'' has a distribution ratio of ``15%'', ``7 patterns'' has a distribution ratio that is not selected, and ``8 patterns'' has a distribution ratio of "15%", and "9 patterns" has a distribution ratio of "10%".

FIG. 58(b) is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbols 38 (at SP reach or more loss), and this table is stored in the sub ROM 120b, for example. For example, the sub CPU 120a, based on the received effect design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the stop special figure data indicated by the effect design designation command is "00", and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is " If it is one of the fluctuation patterns 5 to 10, refer to the table for SP reach or more loss shown in FIG. decide.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), "1 symbol" has a distribution ratio of "10%", "2 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "15%", and "3 symbols". 'symbol' has a distribution ratio of '9%', '4 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '15%', and '5 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '10%'. ``6 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``15%'', ``7 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``1%'', and ``8 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``1%''. The division ratio is "15%", and the distribution ratio for "9 symbols" is "10%".

For example, if it is a loss, normal reach with "7 patterns" is not executed, and there is room for more than SP reach with "7 patterns". is done.
It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 33, if it is lost in the SP reach or more, it is accompanied by the display of the "specific image", so when the reach state is reached with "7 symbols", the SP reach or more is always performed, and the specific It can be said that it accompanies the display of an image.

On the other hand, for example, in the case of losing, there is a possibility of either "normal reach" or "SP or higher reach" when reaching a reach state with "6 symbols". That is, in the case of "6 symbols", it may end with "normal reach" and the "specific image" may not be displayed, or "SP or higher reach" may be executed and the "specific image" may be displayed. .

That is, in the case of losing, when the reach state is reached with "6 patterns" and when the reach state is reached with "7 patterns", the "7 patterns" always involve the display of the "specific image". , and the "specific image" tends to be displayed.
It should be noted that the allocation in FIG. 58 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the trend. For example, "7 symbols" may be selected when normal reach is lost.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 58, (a) when the reach state is reached with "6 symbols" and (b) when the reach state is reached with "7 symbols", the display modes are shown. Supplementary explanation is given using 59 animations.
FIG. 59 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as the content described in FIG.
Also, in FIG. 59, the temporary stop display is omitted.

(a) is when the ready-to-win state is reached with "6 symbols", and in this case, as shown in (N1), the case of normal reach-losing (no display of the specific image 31e) and (SP1-1) As shown in , there are cases where SP reach or more is lost. If SP reach or more is lost, a specific image 31e is displayed as indicated by (SP1-2).

(b) is when the reach state is reached with "7 symbols", and in this case, there is only a case where the SP reach or more is lost. That is, as shown in (SP1-2), there is only a case where the specific image 31e is displayed.
Therefore, in the case of losing, when reaching the reach state with "6 patterns" and when reaching the reach state with "7 patterns", "7 patterns" always accompanies the display of the "specific image". , and the "specific image" tends to be displayed.

FIG. 60(a) is a table showing the distribution of the effect symbols 38 when the symbol fanning is successful, and this table is stored in the sub ROM 120b, for example. For example, the sub CPU 120a has determined any one of "variation production pattern 8", "variation production pattern 20", and "variation production pattern 27" (variation production pattern including success in design boosting in production configuration) as the fluctuation production pattern. In this case, referring to the table showing the distribution of the performance symbols 38 at the time of success of the design promotion shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 60(a), "1 symbol" has a distribution ratio of "12%", "2 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "12%", and "3 symbols". "symbol" has a distribution ratio of "12%", "4 patterns" has a distribution ratio of "12%", and "5 patterns" has a distribution ratio of "12%". ``6 symbols'' have a distribution ratio of ``12%'', ``7 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``4%'', and ``8 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``4%''. The division rate is "12%", and the distribution rate of "9 symbols" is "12%".

FIG. 60(b) is a table showing the allocation of the performance symbols 38 when the symbol fanning fails, and this table is stored in the sub ROM 120b, for example. For example, when the sub CPU 120a determines "fluctuation effect pattern 2" (variation effect pattern including failure of symbol boosting in the effect structure) as the variable effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of failure of symbol boosting shown in Fig. 60(b) By referring to the table showing the allocation of 38, it is determined which production pattern 38 is used to perform the pattern fanning.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), "1 symbol" has a distribution ratio of "10%", "2 symbols" has a distribution ratio of "10%", and "3 symbols". 'symbol' has a distribution ratio of '10%', '4 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '10%', and '5 patterns' has a distribution ratio of '10%'. ``6 symbols'' have a distribution ratio of ``10%'', ``7 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``20%'', and ``8 patterns'' have a distribution ratio of ``20%''. The division ratio is "10%", and the distribution ratio for "9 patterns" is "10%".

That is, the "7 symbols" tend to cause more failures in promoting the symbols and more difficult to succeed in promoting the symbols than the other symbols. For example, if it is "6 symbols", compared to "7 symbols", it is easier for the symbol boosting success to occur, and when the symbol boosting effect occurs, the ready-to-win state is easily formed.
In addition, the variable performance pattern in which the symbol swaying success at the time of losing is performed is “variation performance pattern 8”, and the “variation performance pattern 8” is a variation performance pattern accompanied by display of a specific image.
Therefore, when the pattern fan effect using "6 patterns" occurs, compared to when the pattern fan effect using "7 patterns" occurs, there is a possibility that "fluctuation effect pattern 8" is being executed. It tends to be high and the specific image is likely to be displayed.
It should be noted that the distribution in FIG. 60 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the trend. For example, "7 patterns" may be equally selected with other patterns, or "7 patterns" may be made easier to select than other patterns when the pattern is successful, and when the pattern is unsuccessful, other patterns may be selected. It may be made more difficult to select than the pattern of .
Further, the "odd numbered pattern" may be made easier to select than the "even numbered pattern" when the pattern promotion is successful, and may be made more difficult to select than the "even numbered pattern" when the pattern promotion is unsuccessful. Also, the relationship between the "even numbered symbols" and the "odd numbered symbols" may be reversed.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of FIG. 60, a supplementary explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 61 about a display example of failure of symbol promotion by "7 symbols" and a display example of success of symbol promotion by "7 symbols".
FIG. 61 shows only the image display device 31, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described in FIG.
Also, in FIG. 61, the temporary stop display is omitted.

In the case of failure of design fanning, in (a), "7 symbols" as the left effect symbol 38a is temporarily stopped and displayed, and "7 symbols" as the right effect symbol 38c slowly descends from the upper part of the screen toward the temporary stop display position. Then, whether or not to stop at the temporary stop display position. At this time, the voice output device 32 also outputs a sound effect "GOGOGO♪" to provoke whether or not the "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position.

Then, in (b), the sound effect changes (changes to the sound effect "Gowan♪"), further encouraging whether or not the "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c will stop at the temporary stop display position. In addition, as described in FIG. 58, "7 symbols" is difficult to be selected when SP reach or more is lost, so if "7 symbols" becomes a reach state, the degree of expectation for a big hit is considerably improved. Therefore, when the symbols positioned as described above are provided, the symbol-inciting effect is an effective effect for improving the interest in the game.

Then, in (c), the voice output device 32 outputs a sound effect such as "Suka", and at the same time, the "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c are displayed to move downward on the screen. That is, the same symbol as "7 symbols" as the left effect symbol 38a was not temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position as the right effect symbol 38c, that is, it indicates that the symbol fanning has failed.

Then, in (d), "8 symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

Next, in the case of successful design promotion, (a) and (b) are the same as the failure of design promotion, but in (c), the voice output device 32 outputs a sound effect such as "Kakein♪", and at the same time, It indicates that the "7 symbols" of the right effect symbol 38c is temporarily stopped and displayed at the temporary stop display position, that is, the symbol tilting has succeeded. Then, in (d), "7 symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the right effect symbol 38c, indicating that the ready-to-win state has occurred.

It should be noted that the game state in which FIGS. 58 to 61 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all game states, or may be applied in some game states.

(Summary of Figures 58 to 61)
58 to 61 have the following features.

i.e.
If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (for example, deny the step S311-1 of the jackpot determination process),
With the display of the specific image 31e, the reach effect (variation effect pattern) using the first specific pattern (for example, the production pattern 38 of 6 patterns), and the second specific pattern with the display of the specific image 31e (for example, The reach performance (variable performance pattern) using the 6 pattern performance pattern 38) has a different execution ratio (for example, if the big hit determination process is lost, the 6 symbols are selected even during normal reach, and the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but 7 symbols are selected only when SP reach or higher, so the specific image 31e is displayed. The proportion at which the specific image 31e is displayed is different between the case where it becomes true).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the rate at which the specific image is displayed differs depending on the pattern (the effect pattern 38), so that the interest in the game can be improved.

i.e.
Using a first specific pattern (for example, a production pattern 38 of 6 patterns), a first suggestion production of whether or not to make a ready-to-win production (for example, a pattern inciting production to incite whether or not to make a ready-to-win with 6 patterns) and
Using the second specific pattern (for example, the production pattern 38 of 7 patterns), the second suggestive production of whether or not to make the ready-to-win production (for example, the design fanning production to incite whether or not to make the ready-to-win with 7 patterns) may be executed.
After executing the first suggestive effect with the display of the specific image 31e and then executing the ready-to-win effect (variable effect pattern), and after executing the second suggestive effect with the display of the specific image 31e The variable production (variable production pattern) that executes the reach production has a different execution ratio (for example, 6 patterns are more likely to succeed in design fanning production than 7 patterns, and 7 patterns are more successful than 6 patterns. Therefore, 6 symbols are more likely to be reachable than 7 symbols, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed, and 6 symbols are more likely to be reached. The ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different in the design encouragement effect which encourages whether or not the reach is determined by the design).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the rate at which the specific image is displayed differs depending on the pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67, the fifth characteristic portion of the specific image will be explained.
62 to 67 mainly refer to the operation prompting image, so some descriptions are omitted, but the contents described in FIGS. The contents described above, the contents described in FIGS. 52 to 57, and the contents described in FIGS. 58 to 61 can be used in combination as appropriate.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of an operation prompting image in this embodiment.
FIG. 62 shows only the image display device 31 extracted, and each display element of the image display device 31 is the same as that described in FIG.

The “first operation prompting image” refers to an operation prompting image corresponding to the state in which the effect button 35 is in the non-protruding state, as indicated by 31q. Therefore, even in the operation prompting image, an image showing a state in which it does not protrude upward is displayed.
The “second operation prompting image” refers to an operation prompting image corresponding to the state in which the effect button 35 is projected as indicated by 31r. Therefore, even in the operation prompting image, an image showing a state of protruding upward is displayed.

Note that (a) to (e) show the flow from the display of the operation prompting image to the confirmation stop display, and particularly (c) shows that the specific image 31e is displayed.
That is, the specific image 31e can be displayed and the common specific image 31e is displayed in both the variable effect in which the first operation prompting image 31q is displayed and the variable effect in which the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed. It will be.
As a result, the variable effect in which the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed does not mean that the special specific image 31e is displayed, but the variable effect in which the second operation prompting image 31r is displayed. Also, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended as a failure.
Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare the specific image 31e for the first operation prompting image 31q and for the second operation prompting image 31r, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156. FIG.

In FIG. 62, as examples of the "first operation prompting image" and the "second operation prompting image", an image in which the effect button 35 is in a non-protruding state and an image in which the effect button 35 is in a protruding state are used. As described above, any aspect may be adopted as long as the degree of expectation for the big win is different between the "first operation prompting image" and the "second operation prompting image".
For example, in a gaming machine in which the effect button 35 does not project, an image in which the effect button 35 does not project and is in a normal color (for example, blue) is set as the "first operation promotion image". An image in which is in a non-projecting state and has a color different from the normal color (for example, red) may be applied as the "second operation prompting image".
In addition, in a game machine having another operation means (the above-mentioned effect lever) in addition to the effect button 35, the image corresponding to the effect button 35 is set as the "first operation promotion image", and the other operation means ( You may apply the image corresponding to the above-mentioned production|presentation lever) as a "2nd operation promotion image."

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the displayable operation prompting image and the executable timing for each variation effect pattern at the time of losing will be described.
It should be noted that what is described as "determined" in the correspondence effect corresponds to the notification period (for example, in FIG. 42, (c) T4 to (c) T5) for informing the result of the big hit determination.
That is, during the notification period for notifying the result of the big win determination, the player can be made to operate the effect button 35 (with the lapse of a predetermined time if the player does not operate), and the result of the big win determination can be reported.
In addition, below, "decision" may be called "decision production."
In addition, the "determined effect" is to let the player operate the effect button 35 (with the lapse of a predetermined time if the player does not operate it) and notify the result of the big hit determination, and to have the player operate the effect button 35. It may be possible to execute both of notifying the result of the big hit determination without causing the game, or may be able to execute only one of them.

For example, in case of variation effect pattern 1, the first operation prompting image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation prompting image, and the start of variation is defined as the executable timing. Furthermore, as a corresponding effect, a speech announcement effect is specified.
That is, if the variation effect pattern 1 is used, the first operation prompting image is displayed at the start of the variation, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the speech announcement effect is executed.

For example, in the variation effect pattern 7, the displayable (executable) operation prompting image is defined as the first operation prompting image, and the executable timing is defined as the fluctuation start time and the SP reach time. . Furthermore, as the corresponding effects, a speech announcement effect and a decided effect are defined.
That is, in the variable effect pattern 7, the first operation prompting image is displayed at the start of the change, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialog announcement effect is executed, and at the time of the final effect, the first operation prompting image is displayed again. is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the big hit determination is notified.

For example, in the variation effect pattern 12, as displayable (executable) operation prompting images, the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image are defined, and the executable timings are the start of the variation and the SP reach. time is stipulated. Furthermore, as the corresponding effects, a speech announcement effect and a final effect are defined.
That is, in the variable effect pattern 12, the first operation prompting image is displayed at the start of the change, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the dialog announcement effect is executed, and at the time of the final effect, the second operation promoting image is displayed. Then, if the performance button 35 is operated, the result of the big hit determination is notified.

For example, in the variation effect pattern 16, the first operation prompting image is defined as the displayable (executable) operation prompting image, and the executable timings are the start of variation, the time of SP reach, and the time of SP reach. stipulated. Furthermore, as the corresponding effects, a speech announcement effect and a final effect are defined.
That is, in the variable production pattern 16, the first operation promotion image is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and if the production button 35 is operated, the dialogue announcement production is executed. When the 1-operation prompting image is displayed and the performance button 35 is operated, the result of the big hit determination is notified (in this case, a draw performance occurs and develops into SPSP ready-to-win), and at the time of deciding performance during SPSP ready-to-win, again. , the first operation promotion image is displayed, and if the performance button 35 is operated, the result of the big hit determination is notified.

For example, in the variation effect pattern 18, as displayable (executable) operation prompting images, a first operation prompting image and a second operation prompting image are defined. time is stipulated. Furthermore, as the corresponding effects, a speech announcement effect and a final effect are defined.
That is, in the variable production pattern 18, the first operation prompting image is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and if the production button 35 is operated, the dialogue announcement production is executed, and the second operation is performed at the time of the SPSP ready-to-win decision production. A promotion image is displayed, and if the effect button 35 is operated, the result of the big hit determination is notified.
Since the same applies to other variable effect patterns, detailed description will be omitted. Further, the corresponding effect is not limited to the dialog announcement effect and the fixed effect, and other effects may be applied as long as the effect is accompanied by the operation of the effect button 35 .

That is, the failing variable effect pattern includes a variable effect pattern in which the first operation prompting image is displayed during the variable effect, a variable effect pattern in which the first operation prompting image is displayed multiple times, and a first operation prompting image. and a variable effect pattern accompanied by the display of the second operation prompting image.
Furthermore, during the variable performance, the variable performance with the display of the first operation promotion image at least once (variable performance patterns 1 to 3, 5 to 18) includes a variable performance pattern with the display of a specific image (variable performance pattern 7). 18), and a variation effect pattern (variation effect patterns 1 to 3, 5, 6) that does not involve the display of a specific image, while the variation that accompanies the display of the second operation promotion image during the variation effect The effects (variation effect patterns 12 and 18) include only the change effect patterns (variation effect patterns 12 and 18) accompanied by the display of the specific image. That is, when the second operation prompting image is displayed during the variable effect, the specific image is not displayed.
Thus, even when a failure is notified with the display of the second operation prompting image, the display of the specific image makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win performance has ended with a failure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the correspondence relationship between the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image for SP reach or higher (at the time of losing) will be described.
FIG. 64(a) is an excerpt of the fluctuation production patterns (variation production patterns 7 to 18) of losing more than SP reach of losing.
That is, all of the variable effect patterns are variable effect patterns accompanied by the display of the specific image.

(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image for SP reach or higher (at the time of losing), and shows the relationship between the operation promotion image displayed in the determined effect in each variation effect pattern. showing.
That is, the first operation prompting image defines variable effect patterns 7 to 11 and 13 to 17, while the second operation prompting image defines variable effect patterns 12 and . In addition, the variable effect pattern 12 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the variable pattern 7 is determined, and the variable effect pattern 18 has a distribution ratio of "10%" when the variable pattern 10 is determined. , it can be said that this is a variation production pattern that is difficult to be selected.

(b) shows a comparison of the appearance rate of the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image of SP reach or higher (losing). , the overall distribution is "580/600". is "20/600". That is, the appearance rate at the SP reach or more loss is "29/30" for the first operation prompting image and "1/30" for the second operation prompting image. In other words, when the SP reach or more is lost, the first operation prompting image is more likely to be displayed than the second operation prompting image in the determined effect.
That is, it can be said that it is less likely that the second operation prompting image is displayed and the specific image is displayed than the first operation prompting image is displayed and the specific image is displayed.
It should be noted that the display of the first operation prompting image and the specific image may be less likely to appear than the display of the second operation prompting image and the specific image.

In addition, in the SP reach or higher, the first operation prompting image is more likely to notify a failure than the second operation prompting image in the final effect, in other words, the second operation prompting image is the final effect. The relationship is such that a big win is more likely to be notified than the one-operation promotion image.
That is, the first operation prompting image has a relatively "low" jackpot expectation, and the second operation prompting image has a relatively "high" jackpot expectation.
Therefore, it can be said that the variable effect pattern accompanying the display of the specific image is more likely to appear when the first operation prompting image is displayed, and less likely to appear when the second operation prompting image is displayed.
In addition, in the SP reach or higher loss, when the first operation prompting image is displayed, the possibility of losing is higher than when the second operation prompting image is displayed, so the first operation prompting image is displayed. It can be said that the specific image is more likely to be displayed when the second operation prompting image is displayed than when the second operation prompting image is displayed.
Note that the specific image may be displayed more easily when the second operation prompting image is displayed than when the first operation prompting image is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a comparison between the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state will be given. Note that FIG. 65(a) is a diagram simply showing the ratio of losing and big wins when the first operation prompting image or the second operation prompting image is displayed in the deciding effect for SP reach or higher. b) is a diagram simply showing the ratio of losing and big winning when the second operation prompting image is displayed in the final effect in SP reach or higher.

(a) is a comparison between the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state, and in the high-probability game state, if the SP reach or more, the first operation promotion image or the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decided effect. The percentage of winning is "10/100", and the percentage of winning is "90/100". On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, when the SP reach or more is reached, the ratio of losing when the first operation promoting image or the second operation promoting image is displayed in the final effect is "70/100", and the ratio of winning big. is "30/100".
That is, when the high-probability gaming state reaches the decided production with SP reach or more (when one of the operation promoting images is displayed in the decided production), it is easy to become a big hit, and the low-probability gaming state is SP There is a tendency that when reaching the reach or more and reaching the determined effect (when one of the operation promoting images is displayed in the determined effect), it is easy to lose.
That is, when the operation prompting image is displayed in the decision effect in the low probability game state, the specific image is displayed for the amount that is easy to lose than when the operation prompt image is displayed in the decision effect in the high probability game state. It can be said that it is easy.

It should be noted that the selection ratio described in FIG. 65(a) is merely an example, and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the high-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to “50/100” if the game is a loss, and “50/100” if the game is a big hit in the high-probability game state.
Further, for example, in the high-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100" in the case of a loss, and in the high-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100" in the case of a jackpot.
Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" in the case of a loss, and in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" in the case of a jackpot.
Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100" in the case of a loss, and in the low-probability gaming state, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100" in the case of a jackpot.

(b) is further a comparison in the case where the operation prompting image displayed with the determined effect is the second operation prompting image, and in the high probability game state, if it is SP reach or more, the second operation with the determined effect The percentage of winning when the promotion image is displayed is "1/100", and the percentage of winning big is "99/100". On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state, when the SP reach or more is reached, the ratio of losing due to the display of the second operation prompting image in the final effect is "20/100", and the ratio of winning the jackpot is "80/100". is.
In other words, in any game state, if the second operation prompting image is displayed in the determined effect, there is a tendency that a big win is likely to be reported, but in the high probability game state, the determined effect is achieved in the SP reach or higher. In the case (when the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decided effect), it is easy to become a big hit, and if the low probability gaming state reaches the decided effect with SP reach or more (the second operation promotion image is displayed in the decided effect) If it is done), there is a tendency that it is easier to lose compared to the high probability game state.
That is, the case where the second operation prompting image is displayed in the decision effect in the low probability game state is more likely to be lost than the case where the second operation prompt image is displayed in the decision effect in the high probability game state. It can be said that the image is easily displayed.

It should be noted that the selection ratio described in FIG. 65(b) is merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the high-probability gaming state, if it is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "30/100", and in the high-probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "70/100". In the probability game state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" in the case of a loss, and in the high probability game state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" in the case of a jackpot.
Also, for example, in the low-probability gaming state, if it is a loss, the selection ratio may be set to "40/100", and in the low-probability gaming state, if it is a jackpot, the selection ratio may be set to "60/100". In the low-probability game state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100" if the game is a loss, and if the game is a big hit in the low-probability game state, the selection ratio may be set to "50/100".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 66, 67, and 75, the number of vibrations of the effect button for each variable effect pattern and the executable timing will be described.
In addition, in FIG. 66, "start" indicates the start time of the variable performance, that is, it indicates that the performance button 35 vibrates at the start of the variable performance. Further, "decision" indicates a decision effect of SP reach or more, and indicates that the effect button 35 vibrates at, for example, timing T0 shown in FIG. 67 after the decision effect.
In addition, in FIG. 66, the variable effect pattern accompanying the operation of the effect button 35 is extracted in the determined effect of SP reach or more.

As shown in FIG. 66, the number of times of vibration of the effect button is such that when the result is a loss, vibration is possible at "start" but vibration at "decision" is disabled. Specifically, in the variable production patterns 12, 16 to 18, the production button 35 vibrates in "start", and the production button 35 does not vibrate in "decision". In other variable performance patterns of loss, the performance button 35 does not vibrate for both "start" and "fix".
On the other hand, in the case of a big win, both vibration at "start" and vibration at "final" are possible. Specifically, in the variable production patterns 19 to 24, 26, 27, and 30, the production button 35 does not vibrate in "start", but the production button 35 vibrates in "decide". In addition, in the variable production patterns 25, 28, 29, and 31, the production button 35 vibrates both in "start" and "decision".
Therefore, in the case of a loss, the production button 35 can vibrate "0" times or "1" times in one variation production, and in the case of a big win, the production button 35 vibrates "1" in one variation production. times, or "two" times.
That is, when the number of vibrations of the production button 35 is large (big win = 1 or 2 times), the specific image is less likely to be displayed (loss is more likely to be easy to display).

It should be noted that FIG. 66 simply shows the number of vibrations of the effect button, and the number of vibrations can be appropriately changed as long as the above tendency is followed. For example, the number of vibrating points in one variable effect may be larger. For example, it may be vibrated in the middle stage of the variable production (for example, when transitioning to SP reach).
FIG. 75 is a specific example thereof. In addition, in FIG. 75, "midway" corresponds to the middle stage of the variable presentation (for example, when transitioning to SP reach), etc., as described above.
As shown in FIG. 75, from the viewpoint of the "number of times" of vibration, in the case of a big win, it is configured to vibrate at least once "decidedly". Since it is also equipped with a variable performance pattern that vibrates at all of the "decisions", the performance button 35 is more likely to vibrate than in the case of losing, as in FIG.
Therefore, as in FIG. 66, the specific image is less likely to be displayed ( Lost is more likely to be displayed), there is a tendency such as.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 75, depending on the variable performance pattern, there are cases where the number of times of vibration is greater in the case of a loss than in the case of a big win.
For example, the fluctuation performance patterns 15, 17, and 18, which are lost, vibrate at "start" and "midway," respectively, so the number of times of vibration is two. On the other hand, the fluctuation performance patterns 19, 20, and 21 for big hits vibrate only at "decision", so the number of times of vibration is one. Therefore, there may be a case where the specific image is more likely to be displayed when the effect button 35 vibrates more times (loss = 2 times) than when it vibrates less (big win = 1 time).
In other words, if you vibrate with the “decision”, you will win a big hit, so the degree of expectation for the jackpot will be “decision” > “start” ≒ “midway”, and from the viewpoint of “timing” to vibrate,
(B) When vibrating with "decision" (the number of times of vibration is 1), for example, "fluctuation effect pattern 19"
(B) When vibrating other than "decision" (the number of times of vibration is 2 times), for example, "fluctuation effect pattern 18"
As in the above (b), even if the number of vibrations exceeds the number of vibrations in the above (a), the specific image is more likely to be displayed in the above (b).
In this way, the relationship between the number of vibrations and the display ratio of the specific image is seen in the case of vibrating "number of times" as shown in FIG. may change.

FIG. 67 is a time chart 7 showing the timing of vibrating the effect button 35. As shown in FIG.
(a) Fluctuation effect pattern 7 will be used as an example in which the effect button 35 does not vibrate, and (b) Fluctuation effect pattern 21 will be used as an example in which the effect button 35 vibrates.

(a) is a variation effect pattern 7, in which, for example, an operation prompting image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (button image + press! is displayed) immediately before the timing of informing the result of the big hit determination at timing T0. In addition, just before the timing of notifying the result of the big hit determination at timing T0, press the button image +! is the above-described "determined effect".
Then, at timing T0, it is notified that the result of the big win determination is a loss.

Then, from timing T1 to timing T2, the specific image is displayed for 2S, and then transitions to the "temporary stop display period" and the "fixed stop display period", but the effect button 35 continues to vibrate until timing T4. It is designed not to.
That is, the effect button 35 does not vibrate in the change effect pattern of losing.

(b) is a variable effect pattern 21, in which, for example, an operation prompting image shown in FIG. 62 is displayed (button image + push! is displayed) immediately before timing T0 to notify the result of the big hit determination.
Then, at the timing T0, it is notified that the result of the big win determination is a big win.
Then, at timing T0, a big win is reported, and the effect button 35 vibrates until timing T3.
As a result, it is possible to further raise the mood of the player who is excited by the big win.
Note that the specific image is not displayed until timing T3.
That is, in the big hit variation effect pattern, for example, the effect button 35 vibrates at the timing T0 at which the result of the big win determination is notified.
In addition, in the above example, a mode in which the effect button 35 is vibrated has been described, but it is not limited to vibration, and other modes may be used. For example, it may simply change from the first position to the second position, or the effect button 35 may change from the first emission color to the second emission color.

It should be noted that the game state in which FIGS. 62 to 67 are executed does not matter. For example, it may be applied in all game states, or may be applied in some game states.

In addition, in the resurrection effect of the variable effect pattern 30, the first operation prompting image or the second operation prompting image may be displayed.
In this way, even if the first operation prompting image or the second operation prompting image may be displayed even after the specific image 31e is displayed, the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image are displayed after the specific image 31e is displayed. The distribution may be such that before the display of the specific image 31e is displayed more easily than after.

(Summary of Figures 62 to 67)
62 to 67 have the following features.

i.e.
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first operation prompting image in FIG. 62) displaying a first operation prompting image, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation prompting image is executed. and a second operation prompting effect (for example, the second operation prompting image in FIG. 62) for displaying a second operation prompting image.
A variable effect (for example, FIG. 64) for executing a first operation promotion effect with display of a specific image 31e, and a variable effect for executing a second operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 64) with display of a specific image 31e. have different execution ratios (for example, the first operation promotion effect is likely to be executed in the event of a failure, and the second operation promotion effect is unlikely to be executed in the event of a failure). The execution ratio of the variable production with is also different).
There is such a feature.
As a result, for example, when the first operation-promoting image is executed, the specific image is displayed and often fails, whereas when the second operation-promoting image is executed, the specific image is not displayed. It is more likely to hit the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the display of the specific image indicates that the player has lost the game, and the result of the big hit determination can be estimated from such a display as well.

i.e.
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first operation prompting image in FIG. 62) displaying a first operation prompting image, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation prompting image is executed. and a second operation prompting effect (for example, the second operation prompting image in FIG. 62) for displaying a second operation prompting image.
Both in the variable effects (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) for executing the first operation promotion effect and in the variable effects (for example, FIGS. 62 and 63) for executing the second operation promotion effect (for example, the first operation The specific image 31e can be displayed in both the variable effect accompanying the promotion effect and the variable effect accompanying the second operation promotion effect.
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect ended with a loss in any variable effect.
Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare specific images for the first operation prompting image and for the second operation prompting image, which leads to a reduction in the area used in the CGROM 156 .

i.e.
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first operation prompting image in FIG. 62) displaying a first operation prompting image, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation prompting image is executed. and a second operation prompting effect (for example, the second operation prompting image in FIG. 62) for displaying a second operation prompting image.
There are cases where the variable effect with the first operation promotion effect → the specific image 31e are displayed and cases where they are not displayed (for example, the variable effect pattern 7 can display the first operation promotion image and the specific image 31e can be displayed). On the other hand, the variable effect pattern 1 can display the first operation promotion image, but does not display the specific image 31e).
Variation effect accompanied by second operation promotion effect→Specific image 31e is displayed (for example, the variation effect pattern 12 and the variation effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promotion image and the specific image 31e). .
There is such a feature.
As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended with a loss.

i.e.
Execution of an operation promotion effect (for example, a first operation promotion effect of displaying a first operation promotion image and a second operation promotion effect of displaying a second operation promotion image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the production button 35) It is possible to execute a determination result notification effect (for example, a decision effect) that notifies the result of the determination with.
In the normal game state, the ratio of executing the determination result notification effect (for example, decision effect) with the display of the specific image 31e, and in the high probability game state, the determination result notification effect (for example, decision effect) with the display of the specific image 31e ) is different from the ratio of executing (for example, the ratio (1/300) that is determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state and the ratio (1/60) that is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability game state, the normal game state In the case of , the rate of execution of the determination effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different to the extent that SP reach or more of losing is more likely to be executed).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the degree of appearance of the specific image changes depending on the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

i.e.
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first operation prompting image in FIG. 62) displaying a first operation prompting image, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation prompting image is executed. and a second operation prompting effect (for example, the second operation prompting image in FIG. 62) for displaying a second operation prompting image.
If the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss,
The variable effect for executing the first operation promotion effect with the display of the specific image 31e and the variable effect for executing the second operation promotion effect with the display of the specific image 31e have different execution ratios (for example, , the display of the first operation prompting image is more likely to fail than the display of the second operation prompting image, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed due to the greater likelihood of failure. , the variable effect for executing the specific effect using the first operation-promoting effect and the variable effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation-promoting effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e have different execution ratios) .
There is such a feature.
As a result, when the first operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is displayed and often results in a loss, while when the second operation prompting image is executed, the specific image is not displayed and the big win becomes more frequent. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the display of the specific image indicates that the player has lost the game, and the result of the big hit determination can be estimated from such a display as well.

i.e.
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first operation prompting image in FIG. 62) displaying a first operation prompting image, and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the first operation prompting image is executed. and a second operation prompting effect (for example, the second operation prompting image in FIG. 62) for displaying a second operation prompting image.
Variation performance for executing the second operation promotion performance with display of the specific image 31e in the normal game state, and variation for executing the second operation promotion performance with the display of the specific image 31e in the high probability game state. The production has a different execution ratio (for example, the ratio of determining that it is a jackpot in the normal gaming state and the percentage of determining that it is a jackpot in the high probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is more likely to lose SP reach or more. Since it is easy to execute, a variable effect for executing a specific effect using the second operation promoting effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e in the first game state and the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state. The execution ratio is different from the variable effect that executes the specific effect using the second operation promotion effect).
There is such a feature.
As a result, the degree of appearance of the specific image changes depending on the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

i.e.
During execution of the ready-to-win effect, an operation promoting effect (for example, a first operation promoting effect to display a first operation promoting image and a 2 operation promotion effect) can be executed.
The operation means (for example, effect button 35) can be changed from the first mode (eg, non-vibrating mode) to the second mode (eg, vibrating mode).
When the number of times the operating means (eg, effect button 35) is in the second mode (eg, vibrating mode) is the first number (eg, 0 times), and when the operating means (eg, effect button 35) is set to the second mode The ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different between the second mode (eg, vibrating mode) and the second number (eg, 1 time) (eg, in the case of failure, the effect button 35 is 0 times, and in the case of a big win, the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is 1 time, and when the number of vibrations is 0 times, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed for the loss. Therefore, the ratio of displaying the specific image 31e differs between when the operating means is not vibrated and when the operating means is vibrated).
There is such a feature.
Thus, the display of the specific image and the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 make it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended due to failure.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74, related features will be described.
Note that the display elements of the image display device 31 that are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 43 will not be described.

FIG. 68 shows a display example of the image display device 31 when "sound volume adjustment" is performed during the variable display, particularly at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to “adjust the volume” using the cross button 36 even during the variable display and during the customer waiting state.
Then, when the "volume adjustment" is performed, a level image 31s indicating the current volume level is displayed as shown in FIG. 68(b).
Further, as described above, when the specific image 31e is displayed, no music is output, but the audio output device 32 outputs a volume adjustment sound (“beep♪”) at a volume value corresponding to the current volume level. ) is output.
The display mode (size, display position, color, etc.) of the level image 31s during the variable display and the display mode of the level image 31s during the customer waiting state may be the same display mode, or may be different. It may be an aspect. For example, the level image 31s in the variable display may be displayed in a smaller size than the level image 31s in the customer waiting state, may be displayed in a different display position, or may be displayed in a lighter color. , or it does not have to be displayed in the first place.
Further, during the variable display, the notification may be made only by displaying the level image 31s without outputting the volume adjustment sound (“beep♪”).

That is, according to FIG. 68, when the "volume adjustment" is performed by the cross button 36 at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed at the right corner of the image display device 31 together with the specific image 31e. will be
Thus, even if the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e, the display area of the specific image 31e is larger than the display area of the level image 31s, so that the specific image 31e can be prevented from becoming inconspicuous. .
Note that the example in FIG. 68 indicates that the current volume value is "2". As shown in d), the level image 31s is erased.

As described above, when the "sound volume adjustment" is performed at the timing when the specific image 31e is displayed, the level image 31s is displayed together with the specific image 31e.
As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the timing of performing the "volume adjustment", and at the same time, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended.
Note that "volume adjustment" in FIG. 68 may be read as "light amount adjustment".

Time chart 8 in FIG. 69 shows an example in which (a) is a decorative member announcement (decorative member announcement effect in FIG. is displayed, and (c) shows an example in which an effect using the starter lamp 14b is performed.

(a) is the variable effect pattern 7, and the timing (a) T0 is the timing when the variable display is started. Note that the "decorative member notice" is not executed and the "specific image" is not displayed until timing (a) T2.
Then, when timing (a) T2 is reached, the "decoration member notice" is executed once at a predetermined timing until timing (a) T4 at which the result of the big win determination is notified. That is, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are moved from the initial position to the operating position, and after a predetermined time has passed, they are returned to the initial position.

Then, at timing (a) T4 to timing (a) T5, the "notice of failure" is performed, and the "decorative member notice" is not executed after timing (a) T4 (0 times).
Then, at timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6, the "specific image" is displayed, after which the "temporary stop display period" and the "fixed stop display period" shift.
That is, the time before timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 at which the “specific image” is displayed is higher than the timing after timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 at which the “specific image” is displayed. , the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b are easily moved to the operating position.
As a result, the feeling of anticipation for the big win can be improved by the decorative member announcement effect before the timing of announcing the result of the big win determination.
Further, after the timing of announcing the result of the big win determination, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the sense of anticipation for the big win.

Before timing (a) T5 to timing (a) T6 when the "specific image" is displayed, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may be operated not only once but also a plurality of times. good.
In addition, in the variable performance pattern of losing, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b do not operate after timing (a) T4, but in the variable performance pattern 30 of the variable performance pattern of big win, For example, at timing (f) T7 in FIG. 50, the first decorative member 33a and the second decorative member 33b may operate as part of the resurrection effect.
In other words, in the case of a loss,
Before the display of the "specific image" → it works (won the decorative material notice), and after the display of the "specific image" → it does not work,
Before the "specific image" is displayed → it does not work (not winning the decorative material notice), and after the "specific image" is displayed → it does not work,
In case of jackpot,
Before the display of the "specific image" → it works (won the decorative material notice), and after the display of the "specific image" → it does not work,
Before the "specific image" is displayed → it does not work (not winning the decorative material notice), after the "specific image" is displayed → it does not work,
Before the "specific image" is displayed → it does not work (not winning the decorative material notice), after the "specific image" is displayed → it works (resurrection effect),
Before the display of the "specific image" → activate (won the decorative material notice), after the display of the "specific image" → activate (resurrection effect),
There will be

(b) is a variable production pattern 7, which mainly shows the characteristic part of the scene of "background switching".
Timing (b) T0 is the timing at which the "specific image" is displayed.
At this time, the power of the gaming machine 1 is ON (power is being supplied via the power plug 141).
Then, at timing (b) T1 during the display of the "specific image" (for example, before 2S has passed), a power failure occurs and the gaming machine 1 is powered off (no power is supplied via the power plug 141). becomes. In this case, of course, the image display device 31 is also turned off, so the "specific image" is not displayed either.

Then, at timing (b) T2, the power failure is canceled and the power is restored, and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Note that the timing (b) T2 is during the "background switching" and during the display period of the "specific image" (for example, before 2S has elapsed). Therefore, it is conceivable to display the "specific image" that was displayed before the power failure again, but the image at the time of power restoration (recovering the power, please wait for a while) is given priority over the redisplay of the "specific image". It is displayed on the image display device 31 .
That is, at the timing (b) T2, the "specific image" is not displayed, and the image at the time of power restoration (power is being restored, please wait for a while) is displayed.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs while the "specific image" is being displayed (for example, before 2 seconds have passed), the image at the time of power recovery (Please wait while the power is restored) is displayed rather than redisplaying the "specific image". ) is preferentially displayed on the image display device 31 .
Thereby, according to the current situation of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the content that should be notified to the player with the highest priority.

(c) shows that the effect using the pending icon and the starting port lamp 14b is performed in the continuous variable effect, and as the first variation (first game), the variable effect pattern 1 is executed, As the second variation (second game), it indicates that the variation effect pattern 7 is executed.
It should be noted that any variable effect will be described only for the main part.

The timing (c) T0 is the timing of the "fixed stop display period" of the variation effect pattern 1 in the first variation.
At this timing, the fixed still image is displayed on the image display device 31 . In addition, a game ball enters the first start port 14, and "suspension" is updated from "0" to "1" (stored in the first storage unit).
In addition, based on the ball entering the first starting hole 14, it is elected to execute the prefetch effect using the holding icon and the starting hole lamp 14b, and the holding icon is green from the time the ball enters the first starting hole 14. It is assumed that a look-ahead effect of displaying a pending icon and lighting (lighting) the starting port lamp 14b in green has been executed.
That is, from this timing, the "starting port lamp" changes from off to on (green), and the "image display device" displays the green pending icon image.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
These aspects continue until timing (c) T1.

Timing (c) T1 is the timing at which the variation performance pattern 1 of the first variation ends and the variation performance pattern 7 of the second variation is started.
At this timing, the "normal variation period" in the second variation variation effect pattern 7 starts, and the "image display device" displays the normal variation image and the green pending icon image (shifted to the variation icon display area 31a ) is displayed.
With the start of the second variation, "hold" becomes "0" (no storage in the first and second storage units), and the starter lamp 14b continues lighting (green). That is, the green pending icon image of the "image display device" and the lighting (green) of the starting port lamp 14b are continuously performed over at least two fluctuations.
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, these modes continue until timing (c) T2, and from timing (c) T2, the green pending icon image is hidden and invisible to the player, but the starting port lamp 14b is turned off. The lighting (green) continues and is still visible to the player. That is, even if the green reserved icon image is hidden with the transition to the "SP reach fluctuation period", the starting port lamp 14b emits light in a color corresponding to the hidden green reserved icon image, By visually recognizing the starting lamp 14b, the player can grasp the degree of expectation for the big win.

Timing (c) T3 is the timing of shifting to the "SP reach fluctuation period", and at this timing, the SP reach image is displayed on the "image display device".
In addition, the starting port lamp 14b continues lighting (green).
Note that the "specific image" is not displayed.
Then, after that, at the timing of announcing the result of the big hit determination, the “losing notification” is performed, and the timing (c) T4 is reached.

Timing (c) T4 is the timing of shifting from the "SP reach fluctuation period" to the "background switching", and at this timing, the "specific image" is displayed on the "image display device" for "2S".
In addition, the starting port lamp 14b continues lighting (green).
These aspects continue until timing (c) T5.
Then, at timing (c) T5, the "specific image" is not displayed, but the starting lamp 14b remains lit (green) until the "fixed stop display period" (not shown) is completed. continue.
That is, in the look-ahead effect using the pending icon and the starting port lamp 14b, the pending icon may be hidden and invisible during the variable effect, but the starting port lamp 14b is hidden during the variable effect. always visible.
Therefore, even if the "specific image" is displayed in the "background switching", the light emitting effect (for example, lighting (green)) by the starter lamp 14b will not become invisible due to the display of the "specific image". do not interfere with each other.
As a result, the display of the 'specific image' allows the user to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win performance has ended, and the starting lamp 14b allows the user to grasp the degree of expectation for the big win in the finished ready-to-win performance. can be done.

FIG. 70 shows a case where the "symbol confirmation command" transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received by the effect control board 120 and a case where it is not received normally.
It should be noted that the timing of receiving the "symbol confirmation command" by the effect control board 120 is generally the timing of (c).
Therefore, the display mode is the same in any case until the "notice of failure" is performed in (a) and the "specific image 31e" is displayed in (b).
In addition, the temporary stop display in (c) also has the same display mode until the middle, but if the "symbol confirmation command" is not normally received, the effect symbol is not confirmed and stopped, and the temporary stop display is continued. becomes.

That is, in either case, the "specific image 31e" is displayed, so that the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized.
In addition, when the production pattern in FIG. 70(d) is not fixed and stopped and the "symbol confirmation command" is not received, the temporary stop display of the production pattern continues, and the result of the jackpot determination is not determined, and the player feels annoyed.
However, in any case, since the "specific image 31e" is displayed, it can be inferred that the ready-to-win effect ended with a loss from the display of the "specific image 31e", so the "symbol confirmation command" is received. If not, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed even if the result of the big win determination is not fixed.

FIG. 71 is a table extracting error-related commands related to errors that can occur in the gaming machine 1 and priority orders of the error-related commands.
In FIG. 71, "priority order" indicates which error notification has priority when a plurality of errors occur at the same time, or whether or not notification can be performed simultaneously with other displays. It is the one that defines the time.
For example, when the "large winning opening abnormal winning error" and the "plate full error" occur at the same time, the error notification or the like related to the "large winning opening abnormal winning error" is prioritized.
In addition, if it is "designated when power supply is restored", as shown in FIG. 72 described later, only notification related to power supply restoration is performed (it is impossible to perform notification simultaneously with other displays), and "dish full tank error start designation" is performed. If the tray is full error end designation, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 to be described later, a discharge promotion image 31u prompting discharge of game balls from the receiving tray 40 is displayed simultaneously with the specific image 31e (other displays, etc.). can be notified at the same time).

The error-related commands are "power-on specification" (power ON accompanied by RAM clear switch operation) with priority "1" (highest priority), and "power recovery specification" with priority "2". (power ON without operation of RAM clear SW), "large winning opening abnormal winning error" with priority "3" (for example, large winning opening detection SW turned ON even though the jackpot is not in progress), priority "Panel abnormal error start designation" with priority "4" (for example, a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor (not shown) detects abnormal magnetism or radio waves), "Door open error start designation door open" with priority "5" Error end designation" (for example, the door open switch 133 detects door opening), and "dish full error start designation, tray full error end designation" with a priority of "6" (for example, a predetermined amount or more of game balls are in the tray 40). Detecting that a switch is stored) "Switch unconnected error start designation, switch unconnected error end designation" (for example, detecting that any one of the switches is unconnected) with a priority of "7".

FIG. 72 shows a case (hereinafter referred to as case 1) in which power to the game machine 1 is turned off due to a power failure occurring while the "specific image" is being displayed, and a case in which a predetermined amount of power is supplied to the tray 40 while the "specific image" is being displayed. This is an animation showing a case (hereinafter referred to as case 2) in which game balls are stored and a plate full error occurs.
Note that FIG. 72 corresponds to the time chart for explaining the (b) variation effect pattern 7 described in FIG.

Timings (b) to T0 correspond to timings (b) to T0 in FIG. 69, and in any case, "notice of failure" is performed.
Then, in case 1, the “specific image” is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T1, and at timing (b) T1, a power failure occurs and the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The image display device 31 is turned off (the screen becomes pitch black).
Then, at timing (b) T2, power is restored and the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the specific image 31e is not displayed again on the image display device 31, and an image at the time of power restoration (power is being restored, please wait for a while) is displayed. is displayed.

On the other hand, in case 2, the “specific image” is displayed from timing (b) T0 to timing (b) T3.
Although not shown in FIG. 69, when a plate full error (error with low priority) occurs between timing (b) T0 and timing (b) T3, the front side of the specific image 31e The discharge promotion image 31u is superimposed on the part and displayed.
That is, the display of the specific image 31e and the display of the discharge promotion image 31u are performed simultaneously.
Then, from timing (b) T3, a temporary stop display is performed.

That is, if a power failure occurs while the specific image 31e is being displayed, and a high-priority "specify when power is restored" command is received during the display period of the specific image 31e, the power is restored without redisplaying the specific image 31e. The time image (power is being restored, please wait for a while) is displayed with priority.
On the other hand, if a low-priority "dish filling error start designation" command is received while the specific image 31e is displayed, the display of the specific image 31e is continued, and at the same time, the discharge promotion image 31u is displayed.
As a result, according to the determined priority order, a high-priority item is notified on the entire display area of the image display device 31, and a low-priority item is notified on a part of the display area of the image display device 31. Since notification is performed, accurate display can be performed according to the order of priority.
That is, a high-priority item such as "specify when power is restored" clearly informs the process until the game machine 1 is restored, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

It should be noted that, for example, if a "switch unconnected error" with a priority of "7" occurs during the display period of the specific image 31e, the display mode is the same as the plate full error in FIG.
That is, an image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed together with the display of the specific image 31e.
Here, for the switch unconnected error, it is necessary to turn off the power of the game machine 1 and check the unconnected switch or the like.
Therefore, when the specific image 31e is displayed and the image notifying the switch disconnection error is displayed, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 may turn off the power in order to perform the above confirmation.
In such a case, when the disconnection of the switch is canceled and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on again, the image at the time of power recovery (recovering the power, please wait for a while) is prioritized without displaying the specific image 31e again. displayed.
That is, even if the situation before the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off is that the specific image 31e is displayed together with an image notifying the switch disconnection error, or only the specific image 31e is displayed. , when the power is restored, the specific image 31e is not displayed again, and the image at the time of power restoration (power is being restored, please wait for a while) is preferentially displayed.
As a result, regardless of the display status before the power failure, it is possible to notify that the power of the gaming machine 1 has been restored on the entire display area of the image display device 31 .

FIG. 73 shows a case without a "pending change icon" and a case with a "pending change icon".
Although the description before the "notice of failure" in (a) is omitted, for example, the case where there is a "change pending icon" is when the variable effect is started, the pending icon display area 31b displays " Description will be made on the assumption that the "change pending icon" is displayed.

In the case where there is no "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), as shown in (c) and (d), the pending icon in the normal color ( A pending icon indicated by "○") is displayed.
In the case where there is a "change pending icon", even after the specific image 31e is displayed in (b), as shown in (c) and (d), the pending icon display area 31b has a color different from the normal color. An icon (a pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure) is displayed.
That is, before the specific image 31e is displayed, for example, at the start of the variation in the variable effect, a suspended icon (a suspended icon indicated by "●" in the drawing) having a color different from the normal color is displayed in the suspended icon display area 31b. In this case, after the specific image 31e is displayed, it is displayed again in the pending icon display area 31b in the same display mode (a pending icon indicated by "●" in the figure).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
It should be noted that, before the specific image 31e is displayed, if the reserved icon display area 31b has a color different from the normal color of the reserved icon (the reserved icon indicated by "●" in the figure), after the specific image 31e is displayed, A normal-colored pending icon (a pending icon indicated by "O" in the figure) may be displayed in the pending icon display area 31b (default display after the specific image 31e is displayed).
Also, before the specific image 31e is displayed, if the reserved icon display area 31b displays the reserved icon in a color different from the normal color (the reserved icon indicated by "●" in the figure), after the specific image 31e is displayed, Further, the pending icon may be changed to a color with a high expectation for the big win (for example, the pending icon displayed as "●" is displayed as "⊚").

It should be noted that, when changing the normal-colored reserved icon to the "changed reserved icon", it may be changed through various effects. For example, the pending icon itself may be displayed in a large size, and may be changed through an effect that prompts whether or not it will change to a "change pending icon", or a character image (so-called mini character image) of approximately the same size as the pending icon may be displayed. The mini-character image may be displayed, and the mini-character image may be changed through an effect prompting whether or not to change to the "change pending icon".
However, in the scenes of (b), (c), and (d) in FIG. 73, the effect of inciting whether or not to change to the "change pending icon" is not executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from being obstructed, and it is possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended.

FIG. 74 shows a modification.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when SP reach or SP reach is not executed in any game state, a variable display is performed on one production pattern line (single line), and SP reach is performed. Or, in the SPSP reach, the reach effect may be performed with a plurality of effect pattern lines.
In such a gaming machine, for example, as shown in (a), in the "SP reach fluctuation period", the reach effect by "2 symbols" and the reach effect by "3 symbols" are performed at the same time, so-called double reach effect When (a plurality of production pattern lines) is executed, as shown in (b), after displaying the specific image 31e and shielding the production pattern 38, as shown in (c) and (d), "normal fluctuation You may make it return to the production|presentation pattern line of 1 at the time of "period" etc. being performed.
As a result, it is possible to return to the 1 production pattern line after a pause in the display of the specific image 31e.

Further, the specific image 31e is not limited to an image simulating a shutter shown in FIG. 43 and the like, but may be an image simulating a curtain shown in FIG. , an image of a character (not shown), an image simulating smoke, fog, or haze (not shown), or a white-out image or black-out image (not shown).
Further, even for the same specific image 31e, the display time of the specific image 31e may differ depending on the type of variation effect pattern, for example. For example, the display time of the specific image 31e may be longer in the fluctuating effect pattern involving execution of SP reach than in the fluctuating effect pattern involving execution of SP reach.
Also, two or more types of specific images 31e may be provided. In that case, you may use properly by a game state, a mode, etc.
In addition, the specific image 31e may have a plurality of types for each of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state.
Also, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and the specific images 31e corresponding to the mode in the same game state may be displayed.
Also, a plurality of specific images 31e may be provided, and the plurality of specific images 31e may include, for example, a special specific image 31e that is selected with a high probability when the variation effect pattern 30 is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the resurrection effect will occur when the special specific image 31e is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when the specific image 31e is used for shielding, for example, the specific image 31e imitating a curtain may be used for shielding from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31. FIG. Also, it may be from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31 , from the upper side of the screen of the image display device 31 , or from the lower side of the screen of the image display device 31 .
In this way, by gradually shielding the effect pattern 38 and the like, it is possible to give an interesting appearance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, when the shielding by the specific image 31e is released, it is released from the left side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display element displayed on the left side of the screen, as in the case of shielding. It may be released from the right side of the screen of the image display device 31 and exposed from the display element displayed on the right side of the screen, or it may be exposed from the upper side of the screen of the image display device 31. It may be released to expose the display elements displayed on the upper side of the screen, or may be released from the lower side of the screen of the image display device 31 to expose the display elements displayed on the lower side of the screen. You can go as you please.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery has a probability of one each in the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, but not limited to this, A so-called setting-equipped game machine having different jackpot probabilities for each set value in multiple stages may be used.
For example, as shown in FIG. 5, 1/300 jackpot probability in the low probability game state, 1/60 jackpot probability in the high probability game state as the set value 1, set value 6, low probability game state 1/240 jackpot probability in , and 1/40 jackpot probability in a high-probability game state (the probabilities of set values 2 to 5 are omitted), and arbitrary set values can be set in a game parlor.
By installing the set values in this manner, the player can play the game while guessing whether an advantageous jackpot probability is set or a disadvantageous jackpot probability is set. It can contribute to the improvement of interest.

Then, when such setting values are installed, the specific image 31e may be used to indicate which setting value is set among a plurality of stages of setting values. , to have a role of so-called setting suggestion production).
Specifically, when a set value is set, a command indicating which set value has been set is transmitted, and set value information based on the command is stored in the sub-RAM 120c.
Further, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156, for example, with different designs and colors.
Then, for example, when the variable effect pattern for displaying the specific image 31e is determined, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if not, determines to display the normal specific image 31e. Then, when executing, it is determined to display a special specific image 31e corresponding to the set value information stored in the sub-RAM 120c.

For example, when setting value 1 is set and the setting suggestion effect is executed, it suggests that there is a high possibility that setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5 (odd setting value) is set. It decides to display a special specific image 31e.
On the other hand, when the set value 6 is set and the setting suggestion effect is executed, it suggests that there is a high possibility that one of set value 2, set value 4, or set value 6 (even set value) is set. A special specific image 31e, a special specific image 31e suggesting that one of setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 (so-called high setting value) is likely to be set, and setting value 6 is set, a special specific image 31e is determined to be displayed.
When setting value 6 is set and the setting suggesting effect is executed, it is easy to decide to display a special specific image 31e suggesting that there is a high possibility that an even setting value is set. It may be made difficult to display a special specific image 31e that definitely indicates that is set.

In this way, by giving the specific image 31e the role of so-called setting suggestion effect, for example, it is possible to give useful information to the player who is disappointed that the SP reach is lost. Therefore, the desire to play can be aroused.
In addition, it is possible to make the game more desired to perform the SP reach or higher.

Further, the distribution ratio of the variable effect pattern in FIG. 33 may be changed for each set value of multiple stages. For example, if the distribution ratio in FIG. 33 is a set value of 1 and a set value of 6, another variation effect pattern determination table may be stored in the sub-ROM 120b. For example, in FIG. 33, the distribution ratio of variable production pattern 16 is 70%, the distribution ratio of fluctuation production pattern 17 is 20%, and the distribution ratio of fluctuation production pattern 18 is 10%. In the variable performance pattern determination table of value 6, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 16 is 30%, the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 17 is 30%, and the distribution ratio of variable performance pattern 18 is 40%. may Also, there may be a variable effect pattern that is likely to appear for each set value of multiple stages.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of estimating the set value from the executed variable effect pattern, so that the game interest can be improved.
Note that if the allocation ratio of the variable effect pattern in FIG. 33 changes for each set value in multiple stages, the appearance ratio of the specific image 31e will naturally change for each set value in multiple stages. . In this way, the player can be given the pleasure of estimating the set value even from the specific image 31e whose appearance ratio changes for each set value in a plurality of stages, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Moreover, although the specific image 31e may have a role of a so-called setting suggesting effect, it may have a role of an advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of the occurrence of a big win.
Specifically, the specific image 31e may indicate the degree of expectation that the "resurrection effect" in the variable effect pattern 30 of FIG. 33 will be executed.
In this case, a plurality of types of specific images 31e are stored in the CGROM 156. For example, in the variable effect pattern 18 (losing), the normal specific image 31e is made easier to select than the special specific image 31e, and the variable effect pattern 31e is made easier to select. In 30 (jackpot), the special specific image 31e is made easier to select than the normal specific image 31e, and when the special specific image 31e is displayed, the expectation is that the "resurrection effect" will be executed. make it possible
As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the specific image 31e from merely playing the role of background switching, so that the display of the special specific image 31e can be made to be desired, and the interest in the game can be further improved.
It should be noted that the specific image 31e may have the role of setting suggestion effect and the role of advance notice effect at the same time.
As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the display of the specific image 31e at once, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine has been described as having the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state, but the gaming state provided can be changed as appropriate.
For example, it may be a gaming machine that has a normal gaming state and a high probability gaming state and does not have a time-saving gaming state, or a gaming machine that has a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (for example, a type 1 type 2 type game machine), A gaming machine that does not have a high-probability gaming state may be used.
Even in such a gaming machine, a common specific image 31e may be used in different game states, or a different specific image 31e may be used in each game state.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has developed, there has been a case where the ready-to-win effect is performed after performing the development effect (for example, FIG. 14 of JP-A-2013-121404 "fusuma production" in However, after the ready-to-win effect ends (for example, ends after notifying a failure), no effect is performed. was also a factor in the decline of

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (for example, variable production pattern 1 to variable production pattern 33) can be executed, and the pattern includes a first pattern (for example, production pattern 38) and a second pattern that is different in size from the first pattern. pattern (for example, small effect pattern 38d), and in the variable effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 43 A specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed during (c) T4 to T5), and the second pattern is visually recognized while the specific image is being displayed (for example, (c) T5 to T6 in FIG. 43). After the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) T6 to T7 in FIG. 43), both the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed so as to be visible.
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (for example, variable production pattern 1 to variable production pattern 33) can be executed, and the pattern includes a first pattern (for example, production pattern 38) and a second pattern that is different in size from the first pattern. pattern (for example, small effect pattern 38d), and in the variable effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 43 (c) T4 to T5) can display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e), before the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43) and after (for example, FIG. 43 (c) T7 to T8), the display mode of the second pattern does not change (for example, only patterns consisting of numbers), but the display mode of the first pattern can be changed (for example, only patterns consisting of numbers , it can be changed to a pattern consisting of numbers and a pattern consisting of characters).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design Temporarily stop (for example, stop in a state in which the production pattern 38 is shaken small) and then make a real stop (for example, the production pattern 38 and the small production pattern 38d are completely stopped without moving) Variable production (for example, fluctuation production Pattern 1 to variable production pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable production, it is possible to execute a specific production (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and when the specific production is executed (for example, FIG. 44 (c) T4 to T5) can display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e), and when the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) in FIG. 44), the pattern is temporarily stopped (for example, 44 (c) T6 to T7), a predetermined effect (for example, an action effect by a character pattern) is not executed, but when the specific image is not displayed (for example, FIG. 44 (a)), the pattern is displayed. During the temporary stop (for example, T1 to T2 in (a) of FIG. 44), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an action effect using a character pattern).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a game) (for example, the main CPU 110a); (can store up to a fourth storage unit), and when the determination is made, the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped to display the relevant Identification information display control means (e.g., first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of determination, and a predetermined command (e.g., set and transmitted in each process executed by main CPU 110a Command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting a command), and the effect control means transmits the predetermined command from the command transmission means can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the pattern corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect pattern 38, the small effect pattern 38d) is varied, and the pattern is stopped. (For example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and the reserved image corresponding to the right reserved and stored by the reserved storage means (for example, displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 31c 1st special symbol reserved number (U1), 2nd special symbol reserved number (U2) displayed in the 2nd special symbol reserved number display area 31d Reserved display effect (for example, 1st special symbol reserved number display Display of 0 to 4 displayed in the area 31c, display of 0 to 4 displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 31d) can be executed, and in the variable production, specific production (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, (c) T4 to T5 in FIG. 43), and the specific image is displayed (for example, (c) T4 in FIG. 43) ~ T5) and after (for example, (c) T7 to T8 in FIG. 43), the display mode of the reserved image does not change (eg, the size, design, etc. do not change), but the display mode of the pattern can be changed. (For example, it is possible to change from a pattern consisting only of numbers to a pattern consisting of numbers and a pattern consisting of characters, that is, the size, design, etc. can be changed).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of the determination by displaying, a first game state (eg, normal game state) and the above A game state control means (e.g., main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (e.g., high probability game state, time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (e.g., executed by main CPU 110a) Command transmission means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in each process), and the effect control means is the command It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is changed , It is possible to execute a variable performance (eg, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) to stop the pattern, and in the variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (eg, SP reach, SPSP reach). , when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 45(c) T4-T5 (normal), FIG. 45(c) T4-T5 (high probability)), a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed. Yes, the specific image that can be displayed in the first game state can also be displayed in the second game state (for example, FIG. 45(c) T5-T6 (normal), FIG. 45(c) T5-T6 (high probability ) can display the common specific image 31e).
As a result, the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized by the display of the specific image 31e, and the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop, and at least a first mode (for example, mode A in FIG. 46) and a second mode different from the first mode mode (for example, mode B in FIG. 46) and any mode can be displayed, and in the variable production it is possible to execute a specific production (for example, SP reach, SPSP reach), and the specific production When executed (for example, FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode A), FIG. 46(c) T4 to T5 (mode B)), a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the first The specific image that can be displayed in mode 1 can also be displayed in the second mode (for example, common to T5 to T6 (mode A) in FIG. 46(c) and T5 to T6 (mode B) in FIG. 46(c) specific image 31e can be displayed).
As a result, the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized by the display of the specific image 31e, and the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable performance, a specific performance accompanied by music (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18) is executed. is possible, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variation effect patterns 7 to 18), and in the variable effect, a plurality of songs It is possible to execute the specific effect consisting of (for example, variation effect pattern 5 to variation effect pattern 18), and the result that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the big hit determination process is denied) When the specific image is displayed (for example, variation production pattern 7 to variation production pattern 18), the result is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the big hit determination process is denied). Compared to the case where a specific image is not displayed (for example, variation production patterns 1 to 6), it is easier to execute the specific production consisting of the plurality of songs (for example, variation production pattern Pattern 1 is a variable effect in which a specific image is not displayed, and the number of songs is 1, while variable effect pattern 7 is a variable effect in which a specific image is displayed, and the number of songs is 3 (a reach effect). The number of songs is 2)).
As a result, the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized by the display of the specific image 31e, and the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops ) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) , Among the specific effects, the first specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 7) and the second specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 16) different from the first specific effect, the number of songs Different (for example, the variable effect pattern 7 has 3 songs (the number of songs in the ready-to-win effect is 2), and the variable effect pattern 16 has 4 songs (the number of songs in the ready-to-win effect is 3)), and the first specific effect is executed. There are cases where the specific image is displayed after the second specific effect is executed, and where the specific image is displayed after the second specific effect is executed.
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops ) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) , at least a part of the specific effect (for example, the "background switching" between the "normal reach fluctuation period" and the "SP reach fluctuation period" in the fluctuation effect pattern 7) and the specific image are displayed. The period (for example, the "background switching" between the "SP reach fluctuation period" and the "temporary stop display period" in the fluctuation effect pattern 7) is the period without the music (for example, the period during which the music is not output). ).
As a result, the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized by the display of the specific image 31e, and the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

◆ A tenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (eg, main control board 110) and effect control means (eg, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in processing), and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process). The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) that stops ) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) , before the specific image is displayed, accompanied by the music (for example, in the case of variation effect pattern 7, music A, music B, and music C are output), and after the specific image is displayed, the music is accompanied by the music No music (eg, no music is output).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design Temporarily stop (for example, stop in a state where the production pattern 38 is slightly shaken) and then make a real stop (for example, the production pattern 38 and the small production pattern 38d are completely stopped without moving) Variable production (for example, fluctuation production pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed, and the specific effect is executed (for example, variation production pattern 7 to variation production pattern 18, variation production pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and a variation production accompanying the display of the specific image (for example, In the temporary stop of the pattern (for example, the temporary stop display period) in the variable production pattern 7), the production sound (for example, the stop sound of the production pattern 38) is not output, and the fluctuation production that does not involve the display of the specific image (for example, During the temporary stop of the symbols (for example, the temporary stop display period) in the variable effect pattern 1), an effect sound (for example, the stop sound of the effect pattern 38) is output.
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A twelfth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a big hit determination process), and execution of the special game according to a determination result that the special game is performed by the determination means. and a special game execution control means (e.g., main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the determination, and when the determination is made, the identification information (e.g., special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped to display the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (e.g., first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by main CPU 110a) Command transmitting means for transmitting (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means can receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means (for example, Step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), the pattern corresponding to the identification information (for example, the production pattern 38, the small production pattern 38d) is varied, and the variation production to stop the design (for example, the variation production pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18) can be executed, and when the specific effect is executed (for example , variation performance pattern 7 to variation performance pattern 18) can display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e), and the result of the determination is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311 of the jackpot determination process -1 is denied), accompanied by the display of the specific image, a variable effect that executes a specific effect using the first pattern (for example, a production pattern 38 of 6 patterns), and the display of the specific image, The second pattern (for example, the production pattern 38 of 7 patterns) is different from the variable production that executes the specific production using the 7 patterns. Although the specific image 31e may not be displayed because it is selected during the match, the specific image 31e is displayed because the 7 symbols are selected only when the SP reach or higher is reached. Therefore, the ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different between the case of the ready-to-win with 6 symbols and the case of the ready-to-win with 7 symbols).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot A determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform a game) (for example, a big hit determination process), and execution of the special game according to a determination result that the special game is performed by the determination means. and a special game execution control means (e.g., main CPU 110a) capable of controlling the determination, and when the determination is made, the identification information (e.g., special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped to display the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (e.g., first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) and predetermined commands (e.g., various commands set and transmitted in each process executed by main CPU 110a) Command transmitting means for transmitting (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means can receive the predetermined command from the command transmitting means (for example, Step S1400 of the production control board timer interrupt processing), the pattern corresponding to the identification information (for example, the production pattern 38, the small production pattern 38d) is varied, and the variation production to stop the design (for example, the variation production pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) can be executed, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) can be executed, and the specific effect is performed. When executed (for example, fluctuation production pattern 7 to fluctuation production pattern 18, fluctuation production pattern 30), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and the first pattern (for example, 6 patterns of production pattern 38 ) is used to execute a first suggestion effect (for example, a pattern inciting effect to instigate whether or not to reach with 6 patterns) of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and a second pattern (for example, A case of executing a second suggestive effect (for example, a pattern inciting effect to incite whether or not to reach with 7 patterns) as to whether or not to execute the specific effect using the 7 pattern effect pattern 38). Yes, the table of the specific image A variable effect in which a specific effect is executed after the first suggestive effect is executed, and a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed after the second suggestive effect is executed, and the specific image is displayed. The execution ratio is different for each (for example, 6 symbols are more likely to succeed in design fanning than 7 symbols, and 7 symbols are more likely to fail in design fanning than 6 symbols. Therefore, 6 patterns are easier to reach than 7 patterns, and as much as 6 patterns are easier to reach, the specific image 31e is easier to be displayed. The ratio of displaying the specific image 31e is different in the design inciting effect to incite whether or not the character is selected).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) to stop the variable performance, and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 7 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), and the variation During execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promoting effect (for example, displaying a first operation promoting image or displaying a second operation promoting image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promoting effect The effects include a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect with a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. (for example, display of a second operation promotion image), including a variable effect for executing the first operation promotion effect, accompanied by the display of the specific image, and a display of the specific image, Variation for executing the second operation promotion effect The effects have different execution ratios (for example, the first operation promotion effect is likely to be executed in the event of a failure, and the second operation promotion effect is unlikely to be executed in the event of a failure. Accordingly, the specific image 31e is displayed. The execution ratio of the accompanying variable production is also different).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) to stop the variable performance, and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), and the variation During execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promoting effect (for example, displaying a first operation promoting image or displaying a second operation promoting image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promoting effect The effects include a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect with a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. (for example, display of a second operation prompting image), and in both the variable performance accompanied by the first operation prompting effect and the variable effect accompanied by the second operation promoting effect, the specified An image can be displayed (e.g. 62(c), the specific image 31e can be displayed in both the variable effect in which the first operation prompting image of FIG. 62 is displayed and the variable effect in which the second operation prompting image of FIG. 62 is displayed).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in processing), and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process). The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) to stop the variable performance, and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) is executed. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), and the variation During execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation promoting effect (for example, displaying a first operation promoting image or displaying a second operation promoting image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation promoting effect The effects include a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect with a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. (for example, display of a second operation promotion image), and in the variable production accompanying the first operation promotion effect, there are cases where the specific image is displayed and cases where it is not displayed (for example, Variation production pattern 7 is the first operation A creation promotion image can be displayed, and a specific image 31e can be displayed. On the other hand, in the variation effect pattern 1, the first operation prompting image can be displayed, but the specific image 31e is not displayed). The variable effect pattern 12 and the variable effect pattern 18 can display the second operation promoting image, and can display the specific image 31e).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of the determination by displaying, a first game state (eg, normal game state) and the above A game state control means (e.g., main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (e.g., high probability game state, time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (e.g., executed by main CPU 110a) Command transmission means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in each process), and the effect control means is the command It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is changed , It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping the pattern, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30 ) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) , a determination result that notifies the result of the determination accompanied by execution of an operation prompting effect (for example, display of a first operation prompting image or display of a second operation prompting image) for prompting operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35) A notification effect (for example, a decision effect) can be executed, and in the first game state, the ratio of executing the determination result notification effect accompanied by the display of the specific image, and in the second game state, the specific Different from the ratio of executing the determination result notification effect with the display of the image (for example, different from the ratio of determining the jackpot in the normal game state and the ratio of determining the jackpot in the high probability game state, the normal game state Since SP reach or higher, which is a loss, is more likely to be executed, the ratio of execution of the determination effect accompanied by the display of the specific image 31e is also different).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) to stop the variable effect, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18) can be executed. Yes, when the specific effect is executed (for example, variation effect pattern 5 to variation effect pattern 18), a specific image (for example, specific image 31e) can be displayed, and during execution of the variable effect, operation means (for example , production button 35) (for example, displaying a first operation promoting image or displaying a second operation promoting image) can be executed, and the operation promoting effect includes a first operation promoting effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image), and a second operation promotion effect (for example, a second operation Display of promotion image), and if the result of the determination is that the special game is not performed (for example, step S311-1 of the big hit determination process is denied), the second The specific effect using the operation promotion effect of 1 and the variable effect of executing the specific effect using the second operation prompting effect accompanied by the display of the specific image have different execution ratios (for example, the display of the first operation prompting image is more likely to be lost than when the second operation prompting image is displayed, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed to the extent that it is more likely to be lost. Therefore, a variable effect for executing a specific effect using the first operation promoting effect with the display of the specific image 31e and a variable effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation promoting effect with the display of the specific image 31e. and have different execution ratios).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A 19th configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) for displaying the result of the determination by displaying, a first game state (eg, normal game state) and the above A game state control means (e.g., main CPU 110a) capable of controlling a second game state (e.g., high probability game state, time-saving game state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined command (e.g., executed by main CPU 110a) Command transmission means (for example, main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process) for transmitting various commands set and transmitted in each process), and the effect control means is the command It is possible to receive the predetermined command from the transmitting means (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is changed , It is possible to execute a variable effect (for example, variable effect pattern 1 to variable effect pattern 33) for stopping the pattern, and in the variable effect, a specific effect (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30 ) can be executed, and a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30) , during execution of the variable effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, display of the first operation promotion image or display of the second operation promotion image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the production button 35), The operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect (for example, display of a first operation promotion image) and a degree of expectation that the special game will be executed than when the first operation promotion effect is executed. High secondary operation acceleration an effect (for example, display of a second operation promoting image), and a variable effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation promoting effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the first gaming state. , and the variable effect for executing the specific effect using the second operation promoting effect accompanied by the display of the specific image in the second game state, respectively. Unlike the ratio of judging a big hit and the ratio of judging a big hit in the high-probability game state, the normal game state is more likely to execute the SP reach or more of the loss, so the specific image 31e in the first game state A variation effect for executing a specific effect using the second operation-promoting effect with display, and a variation for executing a specific effect using the second operation-promoting effect with the display of the specific image 31e in the second game state. Each production has a different execution ratio).
As a result, the end of the ready-to-win effect can be clearly recognized by the display of the specific image 31e, and the decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

◇ A twentieth configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) to stop the variable performance, and in the variable performance, a specific performance (for example, variable performance pattern 5 to variable performance pattern 18, variable performance pattern 30) is executed. a specific image (for example, a specific image 31e) can be displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, variable effect pattern 5 to variable effect pattern 18, variable effect pattern 30), and the specific image During execution of the effect, it is possible to execute an operation prompting effect (for example, display of the first operation prompting image or display of the second operation prompting image) for prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 35), and the operation It is possible to change the means from a first mode (e.g., non-vibrating mode) to a second mode (e.g., vibrating mode), and the number of times the operating means is changed to the second mode is the first number of times. (e.g., 0 times) and the case of a second time (e.g., 1 time) different from the first time, the ratio of displaying the specific image is different (e.g., in the case of a failure, the effect The number of vibrations of the button 35 is 0, and In the case of a big win, the number of vibrations of the effect button 35 is one, and the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed when the number of vibrations is zero. Therefore, the ratio of displaying the specific image 31e differs between when the operating means is not vibrated and when the operating means is vibrated).
Thus, the display of the specific image 31e makes it possible to clearly recognize that the ready-to-win effect has ended, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 2 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole, a special game determination is made as to whether or not to generate a special game that is advantageous to the player, and variation effects are performed based on the result of the special game determination. , and when the variation effect is being performed, there was a suggestion effect that suggests the result of the special game determination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221253). However, there is a problem that the interest in the game tends to decrease.

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (for example, variable production pattern 1 to variable production pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variable production. Then, in the variable effect, a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "all Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the “rotation fluctuation period” and “temporary stop display period”), and a suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo continuous 2 notification period” or “pseudo continuous 3 notification period”, the dialogue image “Reach!” It is possible to display a notice effect image 31p (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e"), and execute the suggestive notification effect (for example, display in FIG. ( After a) T1 to (a) T3), when the execution timing of the suggestive effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestive effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to ((a) in FIG. 52). a) Pseudo continuation 2 fluctuation is executed at T5), and the number of the suggestive notification effect and the suggestive effect that can be executed differs before the predetermined timing and after the predetermined timing (for example, before the predetermined timing , "pseudo continuation 2 notification period", "pseudo continuation 3 notification period", "line notice effect", "roulette notice effect", "SU notice effect" can be executed, and depending on each of these It is possible to perform a suggestive production. On the other hand, after the predetermined timing, only the suggestive notification effect of displaying the "specific image 31e" can be executed, and the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the "temporary stop display period" corresponding to the display of the "specific image 31e". only suggestive renditions of are executable).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A second configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (for example, variable production pattern 1 to variable production pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variable production. Then, in the variable effect, a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period", "normal reach fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "all Temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the “rotation fluctuation period” and “temporary stop display period”), and a suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo continuous 2 notification period” or “pseudo continuous 3 notification period”, the dialogue image “Reach!” It is possible to display a notice effect image 31p (for example, display of "Accurate SU5 full rotation" in FIG. 56), display of "specific image 31e"), and execute the suggestive notification effect (for example, display in FIG. ( After a) T1 to (a) T3), when the execution timing of the suggestive effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52) comes, the suggestive effect is executed (for example, (a) T4 to ((a) in FIG. 52). a) Pseudo-continuation 2 fluctuation is executed at T5), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestion notification effect (for example, "pseudo-continuation 2 notification period" or "pseudo-continuation 3 notification period") and the first suggestion A combination of effects (for example, “pseudo-continuation 2 fluctuation period” or “pseudo-continuation 3 fluctuation period”) and a second suggestive notification production (for example, “reach! ”) and a combination of a second suggestive effect (for example, “normal reach fluctuation period”), and after the predetermined timing, a third suggestive notification effect (for example, “specific image 31e") and a third suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the "temporary stop display period") can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ A third configuration for solving the above problems is a gaming machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in the process) (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt processing), and the effect control means is transmitted from the command transmission means The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design It is possible to execute a variable performance (for example, variable performance pattern 1 to variable performance pattern 33) that stops the game, and in the variable performance, a notice performance (for example, dialogue notice performance) that foretells the possibility of the special game occurring. It is possible to execute, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variable performance, and in the variable performance, a suggestive performance according to the result of the determination (For example, temporary stop display of production pattern 38 in "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", "temporary stop display period"), A suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, selection of options in “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, “roulette announcement effect” (for example, “SP ”), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in “SU notice effect” (for example, display of “Accurate SU5 full rotation” in FIG. 56), and display of “specific image 31e”). , said suggestion After the knowledge effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), when it is time to execute the suggestive effect (for example, (a) T4 in FIG. 52), the suggestive effect is executed ( For example, in (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52, pseudo-continuation 2 fluctuation is executed), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestive notification effect (for example, “pseudo-continuation 2 notification period” or “pseudo Continuous 3 notification period") and a first suggestive effect (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period" or "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period") may be executed, and after the predetermined timing, the second A suggestive notification effect (for example, display of a “specific image 31e”) and a second suggestive effect (temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 during a “temporary stop display period”) may be executed. The announcement effect can be executed when the notification effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 52, the dialogue announcement effect can be executed in the “pseudo-continuation 2 notification period” and the “pseudo-continuation 3 notification period”), When the second suggestive notification effect is executed, the forewarning effect is not executed (for example, in FIG. 52, the dialog forewarning effect is not executed in the "background switching" for displaying the "specific image 31e").
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in processing), and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process). The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (For example, variation production pattern 1 to variation production pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variation production. Then, in the variable effect, a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the “temporary stop display period”) and a suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, “ Selection of option in roulette notice effect” (for example, selection of “SP” in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in “SU notice effect” (for example, display of “accurate SU5 full rotation” in FIG. 56) , display of a “specific image 31e”), and after the suggestive notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestive effect ( For example, (a) in FIG. When it comes to T4), the suggestive effect is executed (for example, pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestive notification effect (for example , “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”) and a first suggestive effect (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period”). , “pseudo-run 3 notification period”) and a second suggestive effect (for example, “pseudo-run 3 fluctuation period”). After the timing, a third suggestive effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a third suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop display of effect pattern 38 in "temporary stop display period"). Three effects (for example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed, and the ratio of executing the first effect and the third effect, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect (For example, in FIG. 53, when the number of pseudo-continuations of variation production patterns 3, 9, 14, and 15 is 1, pseudo-continuation is executed like variation production pattern 3, but the specific image 31e may not be displayed, but in the pseudo-continuous number of two of the variable performance patterns 10 to 12 and 16 to 18, the specific image 31e is displayed in any of the variable performance patterns, so the first performance and the second performance are executed. The proportion of the third effect being executed is higher in the case where the third effect is executed than in the case where only the first effect is executed).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in processing), and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process). The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (For example, variation production pattern 1 to variation production pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variation production. Then, in the variable effect, a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the “temporary stop display period”) and a suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, “ Selection of option in roulette notice effect” (for example, selection of “SP” in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in “SU notice effect” (for example, display of “accurate SU5 full rotation” in FIG. 56) , display of a “specific image 31e”), and after the suggestive notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestive effect ( For example, (a) in FIG. When it comes to T4), the suggestive effect is executed (for example, pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestive notification effect (for example , “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”) and a first suggestive effect (e.g., “pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period”). , pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and after the predetermined timing, a second suggestive notification effect (for example, display of “specific image 31e”) and a second suggestive effect (for example, “temporary stop display period”) can be executed. A second effect (for example, background switching effect and temporary stop display effect) consisting of a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 38 in the second effect (for example, a result of the determination that the special game is not performed (for example, a big hit determination If step S311-1 of the process is negative), the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect, and the result of the determination that the special game is performed (for example, step S311 of the big hit determination process -1 is affirmative), the ratio of executing the first effect and the second effect is different (for example, the variable effect patterns 7 to 18 in FIG. , and the variable effect pattern 30 is a variable effect pattern that displays a specific image 31e in the case of a big win. Therefore, the specific image 31e is more likely to be displayed in the case of a loss than in the case of a big win).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game machine comprising main control means (for example, main control board 110) and effect control means (for example, effect control board 120), wherein the main control Means, when the starting condition is established (for example, affirmation of step S310-2 of the special symbol storage determination process, or affirmation of step S310-4 of the special symbol storage determination process), a special game advantageous to the player (eg, a jackpot a game) is determined (for example, a big hit determination process), and when the determination is made, identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed and then stopped Identification information display control means (eg, first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) that displays the result of the determination by displaying, and a predetermined command (eg, each executed by the main CPU 110a (Various commands set and transmitted in processing), and a command transmission means (for example, the main CPU 110a that performs step S700 of the main control board timer interrupt process). The predetermined command can be received (for example, step S1400 of the effect control board timer interrupt process), and the design corresponding to the identification information (for example, the effect design 38, the small effect design 38d) is varied, and the design (For example, variation production pattern 1 to variation production pattern 33) can be executed, and the result of the determination is notified at a predetermined timing (for example, timing of (a) T12 in FIG. 52) in the variation production. Then, in the variable effect, a suggestive effect according to the result of the determination (for example, "pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period", "pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation period", "SP reach fluctuation period", "full rotation fluctuation period", " Temporary stop display of the effect symbol 38 in the “temporary stop display period”) and a suggestive notification effect that anticipates that the suggestive effect will be executed (for example, “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period”, “pseudo-continuous 3 notification period”, “ Selection of option in roulette notice effect” (for example, selection of “SP” in FIG. 56), display of step-up notice effect image 31p in “SU notice effect” (for example, display of “accurate SU5 full rotation” in FIG. 56) , display of a “specific image 31e”), and after the suggestive notification effect is executed (for example, (a) T1 to (a) T3 in FIG. 52), the execution timing of the suggestive effect ( For example, (a) in FIG. When it comes to T4), the suggestive effect is executed (for example, pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation is executed at (a) T4 to (a) T5 in FIG. 52), and before the predetermined timing, the first suggestive notification effect (for example , “pseudo-run 2 notification period”) and a first suggestive effect (for example, “pseudo-run 2 fluctuation period”). After that, a second effect consisting of a second suggestive notification effect (for example, display of "specific image 31e") and a second suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop display of effect symbol 38 in "temporary stop display period") (For example, a background switching effect and a temporary stop display effect) can be executed, and the execution time of the first effect (for example, the time from the “pseudo-continuous 2 notification period” to the “pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation period”) and the 2 effect execution time (for example, time from display of “specific image 31e” to temporary stop display of effect symbol 38 in “temporary stop display period”) different time (from display of “specific image 31e” to “temporary stop The time until the temporary stop display of the production pattern 38 in the "display period" is shorter).
As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Incidentally, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

1 gaming machine 31 image display device 32 audio output device 110 main control board 110a main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 production control board 120a sub CPU
120b Sub-ROM
120c sub-RAM
150 display/sound control unit 155 image control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means, performance control means, and operation means operable by a player,
The main control means is
Determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player;
identification information display control means for displaying the result of the determination by variably displaying the identification information and then stopping the display when the determination is made;
command transmission means for transmitting a predetermined command,
The production control means is
capable of receiving the predetermined command from the command transmission means;
It is possible to execute a variation effect to change the pattern corresponding to the identification information and stop the pattern,
Notify the result of the determination at a predetermined timing in the variable production,
Before the predetermined timing,
It is possible to execute a first effect according to the result of the determination,
After the predetermined timing,
A second effect that is different from the first effect and can be executed according to the result of the determination,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that the player expects in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective period that occurs during execution of the variable effect,
During the execution of the first effect, while it is possible to execute the operation effect,
A gaming machine in which the execution of the operation performance can be restricted while the second performance is being executed.

Images